Home

Rev S - AMETEK Programmable Power

image

Contents

1. 91 4 23 Status Subsystem Commands sse entree 98 4 24 System Commands esses aaran Sepa o tnnt iaiia ae aaa eiaeia Epa eaaa 105 4 25 Trace Subsystem 2 111 4 26 Trigger Subsystem url as etl avenged 113 52 Common Commands sais 118 2 Em 119 5i ES A RENE 119 sos 120 mock EE 120 Poggi M 120 Mec 120 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II adc we TET 121 Md ilm rM 122 IT LEE TD 123 5 10 SBEL aiit iD ME E ILLAE 123 ttc esee e adve ve 123 512 AG rigs les TEE 124 124 125 6 Programming 126 Meses 126 6 2 Programming the Output nnne nnne 126 6 3 Coupled Commands cocer ID ien ue i ede ea ned bee Papa ade vue eg Dau 130 6 4 Programming Output Transients nennen nnne nennen nnne nnne 131 6 5 Step and Pulse Transients rote ee ae pectet er Pi Rd quc e NER naa 132 6 6 sist Parle Mt 134 6 7 Triggering Output
2. 114 address 11 AMD option commands ainan 219 APE COImpatibility 165 IEEE488 2 common commands 164 184 B block 46 50 Bus speed delay bilge havent 150 CALibrate MEASure CURRent 38 CALibrate MEASure CURRent SPHase 38 CALibrate MEASure VOLTage 38 95 39 39 CALibrate SOURce PHAS 39 CALibrate SOURce VOLTage HRANge 39 command subsystem 37 Command delays andes pte indeed te 150 commands E EEA A 15 gt 16 Conventions 04 40 13 Copyright iae etes 2 COUP t 16 GURRBOODLD t dee 72 CURRent PROTection DELay 72 CURRent PROTection STATe 73 D DAT Aa acero fetis aia oem a s 112 DATA GATalog me hrec 113 DATA DEFNE i ite e cens 113 113 113 DISPlay MODE 41 DISPlay STA ttt 41 DISPIayz EXT vc aon staan tette 42 DO160 R
3. 135 6 8 Making Measurements nene TASAA EAEE ERE SERENE 139 6 9 Controlling the Instantaneous Voltage and Current Data 144 6 10 Downloading Arbitrary Waveforms 4 2 44 148 6 11 Command Processing 0 2 20 01100 inneren 149 Programming the Status and Event Registers esee eee ennt nnn nnns 150 743 Power On GConditions 3 2 tende ster tt etd HE RR net dare FR aaia 150 7 2 Operation Stats 150 7 3 Questionable Status Group sss ener nnne 153 7 4 Questionable Instrument Isummary Status Group sssssssssseeeeeeeneen nen 154 7 5 Standard Event Status Group ssssssssssssssssssssseseene ener enne nnns nennen 155 7 6 Status Byte Register e 156 Examples xit pado n e 157 7 8 Remote Inhibit and Discrete Fault 2 004 4000 8 160 7 9 SCPI Command Completion sss enne nnne 161 8 Option COMMANAS ce 162 x rere EP 162 8 2 APE Command Language Abbreviated Plain 163 8 8 ABLE Command Language Atlas Based
4. 6 Table of Figures 8 Table 8 TCP IP IP address Rees 29 Port number e eee 33 lermmilliatOp Meteo eves A E 18 237 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II tte 112 113 TRACe DEFine sese 113 TRACe DELete sse 113 113 116 117 TRiGger ACQuire SOURCE 118 116 TRIGger SEQuencet DEFine 118 TRIGger SEQuence2 DEFine 118 TRIGger SEQuence2 PHASe 117 TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce 117 TRIGger SEQuencesS 117 TRIGger SEQuence3 DEFine 118 TRIGger SEQuenceS3 SOURce 118 TRIGger SOURce 116 TRIGger SYNCHronize PHASe 117 TRIGger SYNChronize SOURce 117 U User manual ee 11 User s 9 V VB sample waveform convers
5. 488 2 Dot2 commands can be accessed without having to switch to SCPI mode e VOLTS CURL FREQ RNG RNGF CLS and OPN can be queried by appending a question mark The return data reflects the active setting 8 3 4 Serial Poll Status Bytes STATUS DESCRIPTION 64 Servo Error This is caused by an open servo or a servo that could not maintain the output voltage to the set value 67 Over voltage error Output voltage exceeds program value 71 A phase current limit error 72 B phase current limit error 73 C phase current limit error 74 Syntax error Command not recognized by the source 75 Command error Data out of range for programmed parameter 76 Buffer over flow Input message exceeds the input buffer size 78 This error message will not be generated 79 Measurements complete TEST n and TST commands will generate status byte 79 when complete Table 8 9 ABLE languange Serial Poll Status Bytes 187 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 4 Note RTCA DO 160D 160 The following are the remote commands available for the 160 test option The ABORt command will terminate the test in progress at any time See the Lx Ls Series User Manual P N 7004 980 for more details about the implementation of each 160 test step Only revision C and D are implemented in firmware and as such have specific SCPI commands assiated with it The revision E implementat
6. 43 4 8 Array Measurement Subsystem 04 0000000 45 4 9 Current Measurement 51 4 10 Frequency Measurement Subsystem 1 1 0 56 4 11 Power Measurement 57 4 12 Voltage Measurement 59 4 13 Output Subsysleri od ide dd ie fes re bee 62 4 14 Power On 4 44 4 entes nn 67 4 15 Sense Subsystem 4 00 2 00 69 4 16 Source Subsystem 71 4 17 Source Subsystem ener entente 7 4 18 Source Subsystem Function esses 76 4 19 Source Subsystem List 4 40 ten ati ian ende tn tte ae a uii tenera 79 4 20 Source S bsystem Phase etie metae aed repre 86 4 21 Source Subsystem Pulse sssssssssssssssesses teens st treten rennen ss nnns 88 4 22 Source Subsystem Voltage
7. 6t Interface Configuration Type RS232 Settings C Comi C Com3 5 Com2 C Coma RS232C Serial C Com Cancel Baud 460800 C mB C Simulation mode EEE 488 Bus Help C LAN TCP P Verify Connection Hi HShk CHECK UART FIFO SETTINGS THEH CLICK VERIFY See Help Send Command x Receive Figure 3 2 LxGui Interface Settings for use of USB port Note Use of the USB port to control more than one power source from a single PC is not recommended as communication may not be reliable Use GPIB interface for multiple power source control 27 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 3 3 LAN Option Note An Ethernet LAN interface option is available for the Lx Ls Series power sources This option must be specified at the time of order A LAN option indicator will appear on the model number tag at the rear panel of the power source to indicate the presence of this option Also a RJ45 Socket will be present on the rear panel Using LAN lets you communicate with the instrument remotely it is fast simple and the LAN from your PC does not require any additional proprietary software or cards If a USB cable is plugged into the USB interface connector of the power source the LAN interface will be disabled Remove any USB connection to use the LAN Ethernet port 3 3 1 MAC Address Each power source with the LAN option installed has a unique network address M
8. nto onte t Ee eer 104 STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary Ms 104 STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary EE 104 STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary M M 103 STATus QUEStionable NTR STATus QUEStionable PTR 102 STATus QUEStionable 101 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess 107 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess 107 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GWADodress 107 108 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HBITs 108 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PORT 108 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 108 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS 109 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity 109 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs 109 109 SYSTem CONFiguration NOUT puts 109 110 SYSTem ETIMe 110 110 SYSTem LOQCal 110 110 1 111 SYSTem TEMPerature 111 SYSTem VERSion 111 Table of
9. 201 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 87 MIL STD 704 Rev A F 704F The following are the remote commands available for the 704F test option There are two firmware options available for MIL STD 704 testing the 704 option and the 704F option e Option 704 covers revisions D through F and matches the traditional implementation used on other California Instruments AC power sources This mode provides shorted test times but does not follow the test protocols that were published with revision F in 2004 This option uses SCPI command syntax prefix MIL704 and is covered in this chapter e Option 704F covers revisions A thorugh F and does follow the new test protocol guidelines published in 2004 The 704F option uses SCPI command syntax prefix MS704 and is covered in chapter 8 7 The MS704 commands may be used to access the 704F option standard implementation on the Ls Lx Series All commands for this option have a MS704 prefix instead of the MIL704 prefix used for the legacy 704 option The 704F option implementation goes beyond the legacy implementation used for revisions D and E of the MIL STD 704 and incorporates all revisions from A through F Note The 704F was released with revision 1 00 of the Lx Ls firmware If your unit has a version prior to this release the MS704 commands will not be available A firmware update will be required to use this mode Visit www programmablepower com for update
10. front panel graphic design has been enhanced for a more pleasing look e The Output D and E terminal block is no longer installed on the standard Lx and Ls units unless the auxiliary output option AX is installed This makes the standard output terminal block more easily accessible No other functional differences exist between the Series and Series II AC power sources The RS232C interface is still available in addition to the USB interface The expression AC source as used in the manual also applies to the same series You will find the following information in the rest of this manual Chapter 2 Introduction to SCPI Chapter 3 System Considerations Chapter 4 SCPI Command Reference Chapter 5 Common Commands Chapter 6 Programming Examples Chapter 7 Programming the Status and Event Registers Chapter 8 Options Appendix A SCPI command tree Appendix B SCPI conformance information Appendix C Error messages 11 Documentation Summary The following document is related to this Programming Manual and may have additional helpful information for using the AC source e User s Manual P N 7004 980 Includes specifications and supplemental characteristics how to use the front panel how to connect to the instrument and calibration procedures 1 1 1 External References SCPI References The following documents will assist you with programming in SCPI e Beginner s Manual to SCPI Highly recommended for anyone who has not had pr
11. Load exceeds current limit and unit is in Constant Voltage CV mode of operation Reduce load or increase CL setting Output voltage is driven above programmed voltage by external influence Load voltage kickback etc Load exceeds current limit and unit is in Constant Voltage CV mode of operation Reduce load or increase CL setting Reduce load Ensure proper air flow and exhaust clearance Check fan s for operation 804 External sync error Could not sync to External sync signal missing external sync signal disconnected or out of range Initial memory lost Initial settings could not be recalled at power up Hardware configuration settings could not be recalled at power up Limit memory lost Save power on settings again to overwrite old content Contact AMETEK service department at service programmablepower com to obtain instructions on restoring configuration data 807 System memory lost Memory corrupted Recycle power during power up Calibration data lost during power up Calibration memory lost One or more transient list parameters missing Missing list parameter Contact AMETEK service department at service programmablepower com to obtain instructions on restoring calibration data or recalibrate unit Check programmed lists 230 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series Il 814 Voltage peak error Peak voltage This error may occur when selecting excee
12. Command Syntax SENSe COUPIe lt CRD gt Parameters AC DC RST Value DC Examples SENS COUP DC Query Syntax SENS COUP Returned Parameters CRD Related Commands SENS SWE TINT SENSe SWEep OFFSet This command defines the trigger point expressed in seconds relative to the start of the returned data record when an acquire trigger is used The values can range from MIN to MAX depending on the phase mode and the selected sample interval When the values are negative the values in the beginning of the data record represent samples taken prior to the trigger Command Syntax SENSe SWEep OFFSet lt NRf gt Parameters lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum RST Value 0 Examples SENS SWE OFFS 12E 3 Query Syntax SENSe SWEep OFFSet Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands SENS SWE TINT MEAS ARR SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts This command defines the trigger point expressed in sample points relative to the start of the returned data record when an acquire trigger is used The values can range from 4095 to 2E9 When the values are negative the values in the beginning of the data record represent samples taken prior to the trigger 69 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts lt NRf gt Parameters 4096 through 2E9 MINimum MAXimum RST Value 0 Examples SENS SWE OFFS POIN 2047 Query Syntax SENSe SWEep OF FSet POINts Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands SENS SWE TIN
13. D OQ w d 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Vv TO CALIBRATE ME gt CAL VLT CUR PWR ASUREMENT n QU TO REQUEST TALKING A PROGRAMMED PARAMETER OR MEASURED VALUE TLK AMP gt RQ Al RL IBI NG NU NOTE NOT SUPPORTED ON Ls Series TO RECALL A REGISTER gt REC n gt Figure 8 1 APE Command Tree Notes A Represents either an IEEE 488 END or EOS message The EOS message be an ASCII Carriage Return CR Line Feed LF or just LF n Represents a numeric value 169 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 2 9 APE Program Headers The table below shows the APE headers the phase selection extension and available arguments If the phase extension s do not follow the header the command will be applied to all available phases HEADER EXTENSION ARGUMENT DEFINITION AMP or numeric data Amplitude in volts from 0 0 to RNG value CAL or or numeric data Calibration Coefficient for output voltage CAL AMP from 0 0 to 4095 Range was 0 to 255 on L Series CAL VLT Expected Actual voltage at remote sense CAL CUR A B C Expected Actual current from power source CAL PWR Expected Actual power from power source Not available on Ls Series CLK I
14. RCL lt value gt RST SAV lt value gt SRE value SRE STB TRG TST WAI ABORt CALibrate MEAS CURRent SPHase VOLTage PASSword PHASe SAVE SOURce VOLTage DATA TRACe CATalog DATA lt trace_name gt lt n gt lt n gt DEFine trace name trace name 1024 DELete NAME trace name ALL DIAGnostic RESet TEMPerature AMBient DISPLay 5 MODE 00160 NORMal FREQ MINinum MAXimum VOLTage UNBalance WAVeform DISTortion VOLTage MODulation numeric INTerrupt numeric SURGe FREQency MODulation numeric TRANSient VARiation EMERgency FREQ MINimum VOLTage UNBalance ABNormal stage VOLTage UNDer OVER UNBalance FREQuency TRANSsient STANdard GROup INITiate IMMediate SEQuence 1 3 NAME TRANSient ACQuire CONTinuous SEQuence 1 lt bool gt NAME TRANsient bool INSTrument COUPIe ALL NONE NSELect 1 2 3 SELect OUTPut1 OUTPut2 OUTPut 3 LIMit CURRent FREQuency HIGH FREQuency LOW PHASe VOLTage HIGH VOLTage LOW MEASure FETCh SCALar CURRent DC AC ACDC AMPLitude MAX RESet CREStfactor HARMonic AMPLitude n PHASe n THD NEUTral DC AC HARMonic AMPLitude n PHASe n FREQuency POWer
15. Subsystem Syntax MEASure FETCh SCALar FREQuency Returns the output frequency MEASure FREQuency FETCh FREQuency This query returns the output frequency in Hertz Query Syntax MEASure SCALar FREQuency FETCh SCALar FREQuency Parameters None Examples MEAS FREQ FETC FREQ Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt 56 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 11 Power Measurement Subsystem This subsystem programs the power measurement capability of the Lx Ls Series Two measurement commands are available MEASure and FETCh MEASure triggers the acquisition of new measurement data before returning a reading FETCh returns a reading computed from previously acquired data Individual outputs of a three phase source are specified by the setting of INSTrument NSELect Subsystem Syntax MEASure FETCh SCALar POWer DC Returns the dc component of power REAL Returns real power APParent Returns VA REACtive Returns VAR PFACtor Returns power factor Returns real 3 phase total power MEASure POWer FETCh POWer Phase Selectable These queries return the dc component of the power being sourced at the output terminals in watts Query Syntax MEASure SCALar POWer DC FETCh SCALar POWer DC Parameters None Examples MEAS POW FETC POW Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure POWer AC FETCh POWer AC Phase Selectable These queries return
16. 60 FETCh VOLTage HARMonic PHASe 61 FETCh VOLTage HARMonic THD 61 FETCh VOLTage HARMonic 61 FETCh VOLTage 60 firmware Updates 12 format waveform 48 formats ne ce Se ti 19 FREQency SLEW TRIGgered 75 FREQue nGCy 74 74 FREQuency SLEW 75 75 76 FUNGOD 7e ere t hrs 77 Function 66 FUNCtion CSINUSOId 78 FUNCtion MODE eere 77 78 header optional 17 Separator cepere neas 17 Header etre n 14 headers optlorial etes 15 Headers i 17 IEEE itae e 10 setting 0 202 11 IEEE488 2 common commands ABE iie tpi deus 164 184 Initialization 127 INITiate CONTinuous NAME 115 INITiat
17. Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 7 4 MS704 Abnormal State Commands Abnormal state tests can be started by sending one of the MS704 ABN commands Available abnormal state commands are listed below MS704 ABNormal LIMits ALL This command will run all abnormal state operation mode tests Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal LIMits ALL Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN LIM Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal LIMits NOMinal This command will run the abnormal state nominal operation mode test Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal LIMits NOMinal Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN LIM NOM Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal LIMits LOW This command will run the abnormal state low operation mode test Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal LIMits LOW Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN LIM LOW Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal LIMits HIGH This command will run the abnormal state high operation mode test Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal LIMits HIGH Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN LIM HIGH Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient ALL This command will run all the abnormal voltage transients tests Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient ALL Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN VOLT TRAN Query Syntax none 212 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient OVER This command will run the abnormal over voltage transients test Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal VOL
18. Related Commands None PONSetup PEAK CURRent PROTection This command can be used to disable the peak current shutdown mode It is factory disabled and should be left disabled for most situations This command is not available on the HP6834B CI4500iL Command Syntax PONSetup PEAK CURRent PROTection Parameters 0 1 PONS PEAK CURR 1 Query Syntax PONS PEAK CURR Returned Parameters 0 1 Related Commands OUTP PROT DEL PONSetup SYNChronize SOURce This command can be used to set the initial sync mode between External Sync or Line Sync This requires the EXT or LNS option respectively This command is supported in firmware revision 1 50 and higher Command Syntax PONSetup SYNChronize SOURce Parameters EXTernal LINE Examples PONS SYNC SOUR EXT Query Syntax PONS SYNC SOUR Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands FREQuency MODE SENSe 67 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il PONSetup RELay HOLD This command is used to set a delay time between programming down the output voltage to 0 volt and opening the output relay This provides some time for any inductive loads connected at the output of the power source to discharge into the amplifiers before opening the output relays OUTP 0 command or front panel On Off Without this delay inducative EUT s may kick up a high flyback voltage The same delay time is also used to program down and hold the voltage to zero volt be
19. SEQuence3 IMMediate SOURce BUS EXTernal IMMediate SEQuencet DEFine TRANsient SEQuence2 DEFine SYNChronize SEQuence3 DEFine ACQuire 222 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II Appendix B SCPI Conformance Information SCPI Version The power source conforms to SCPI version 1992 0 SCPI Confirmed commands ABOR CAL DATA CAL STAT INIT IMM INIT IMM SEQ or NAME INIT CONT SEQ or NAME INST COUP INST NSEL MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR DC MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR AC MEAS or FETC SCAL FREQ MEAS or FETC SCAL POW DC MEAS or FETC SCAL POW AC REAL MEAS or FETC SCAL VOLT AC MEAS or FETC ARR CURR DC MEAS or FETC ARR VOLT DC OUTP STAT OUTP COUP OUTP PROT CLE OUTP PROT DEL OUTP TTLT MODE OUTP TTLT STAT PONS CLOC SENSe COUPIle SENSe CURR ACDC RANG UPP SENS SWE OFFS POIN SENS SWE TINT SOUR CURR LEV IMM AMPL SOUR CURR PROT DEL SOUR CURR PROT STAT SOUR FREQ CW or IMM SOUR FREQ MODE SOUR FUNC SHAP IMM SOUR LIST COUN SOUR LIST CURR SOUR LIST CURR POIN SOUR LIST DWEL SOUR LIST DWEL POIN SOUR LIST FREQ LEV SOUR LIST FREQ LEV POIN SOUR LIST MODE SOUR LIST PHASE SOUR LIST VOLT LEV SOUR LIST VOLT LEV POIN SOUR PHAS IMM SOUR PULS COUN SOUR PULS DCYC SOUR PULS HOLD SOUR PULS PER SOUR PULS WIDT SOUR VOLT ALC or SENS SOUR SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL SOUR VOLT LEV TRIG AMPL SOU
20. STB or serial poll 2 Read the corresponding Event register for each summary bit to determine which events caused the summary bit to be set Use STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus OPERation EVENI ESR Note When Event register is read it is cleared This also clears the corresponding summary bit 3 Remove the specific condition that caused the event If this is not possible the event may be disabled by programming the corresponding bit of the status group Enable register or NTR PTR filter A faster way to prevent the interrupt is to disable the service request by programming the appropriate bit of the Service Request Enable register 7 7 2 Servicing Questionable Status Events This example assumes you want a service request generated whenever the AC source s overvoltage overcurrent or overtemperature circuits have tripped From Figure 7 1 note the required path for Questionable Status conditions at bits 0 1 and 4 to generate a service request RQS at the Status Byte register The required register programming is as follows 1 Program the Questionable Status PTR register to allow a positive transition at bits 0 1 or 4 to be latched into the Status Event register Use STATus QUEStionable PTR 19 1 2416 19 2 Program the Questionable Status Enable register to allow the latched events to be summed into the QUES summary bit Use STATus QUEStionable ENABle 19 3 Program the Service Request Enable register to a
21. button to continue Note that some PCs may have this verification disabled in which case this screen will not pop up Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Ls Lx AC Source has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing The installation will now proceed This process may take several minutes to complete 24 P rogramming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for Ls Lx AC Source Click Finish to close the wizard Once completed the dialog box shown above will appear signaling the device drivers have been installed The USB interface is now available to the PC s operating system To complete the install process click on the Finish button To verify the USB port is available you can access the Windows System Properties screen select the Hardware tab and open the Windows Device Manager screen The Lx Ls Source should be listed under Port COM amp LPT as shown in the image below 25 P
22. rogramming Manual Device Manager File Action Help R OFLABTESTBED 4 Computer Data Acquisition Devices S Disk drives E Display adapters 5 DVD CD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers JB Floppy disk drives E IDE controllers gt Keyboards 9 7 Mice and other pointing devices Monitors National Instruments GPIB Interfaces Ports amp LPT Communications Port COMS 7 asi Printer Port LPT1 See Sound video and game controllers 2 System devices E 4 Universal Serial Bus controllers Figure 3 1 Windows XP Device Manager USB Port Lx Ls Series Il 26 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 3 2 2 USB Interface Use Note that the power source will be detected automatically when turn on or plugged in once the drivers have been installed It is recommended however to close any open USB connections to the AC source before turning it off To use the USB interface you may use the Gui Windows software supplied with the power source or develop your own application code In either case set the baud rate on the power source to 460 800 in the Configuration menu From Lx Ls Front panel press MENU key scroll to CONFIGURATION and press ENTER key Select BAUDRATE field and scroll to 460800 For use with the LxGui program select the RS232C Serial interface type and set the Baud rate to match the baud rate on the Lx Ls Source
23. AMP The AMP header with the optional A B or C extension is used to identify the amplitude command The argument is a numeric data field from 0 0 to the limit set by the RNG value An attempt to program a value higher than this value will generate an error and a SRQ on the GPIB The following ASCII strings will program the voltage given in the left column To Set Issue A B C 0 0 volts or AMPAOAMPBOAMPCO A B C 10 5 volts AMP10 5 or AMP1 05E1 or AMP105E 1 A B C 100 volts AMP100 or AMP100 0 or AMP1E2 110 5 115 AMPA110 5AMPB110 5AMPC115 or AMP110 5AMPC115 To program Frequency FRQ The FRQ header is used to identify the following numeric data as frequency The following string will program the frequency to 60 56 Hz FRQ 60 56 To program Phase angle PHZ The PHZ header with the optional A B or C extension is used to identify the following numeric data as phase The PHZ header sent with no extension will program the B and C outputs in phase with phase A The phase of the A output will lead the EXT SNC signal by the value programmed The following example will program the phase A output to 90 degrees relative to an external sync signal when operating in the EXT SNC mode PHZA 90 The following example will program phase B to 240 5 degrees and phase C to 119 3 degrees leading phase A PHZB 240 5 PHZ C 119 3 173 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il The PHZA value can be used to control the point o
24. DC REAL APParent 219 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II REACtive PFACtor TOTal VOLTage DC AC HARMonic AMPLitude n PHASe lt n gt THD ARRay CURRent DC HARMonic AMPLitude n PHASe lt n gt NEUTral DC HARMonic AMPLitude n PHASe lt n gt MODe BIN ASC VOLTage DC HARMonic AMPLitude n PHASe lt n gt THD MODE RMSQ FUND MIL704 SSTate VOLTage LEVel MODulation UNBalance PHASe UNBalance WAVeform DISTortion FREQuency LEVel MODulation TRANSsient VOLTage LOW HIGH FREQuency LOW HIGH ABNormal VOLTage UNDer OVER FREQuency UNDer OVER EMERgency VOLTage FREQuency 400HZ 60HZ VFRequency VERSion D E F MS704 NORMal SSLimits ALL NOMinal OW HIGH UNBalance VOLTage PHASe DIFFerence MODulation DISTortion TRANsient ALL OVER UNDer COMBination REPetitive FREQuency MODulation TRANsient ALL OVER UNDer COMBination POWer FAIL COMBination ALL ONE TWO THRee PHASe REVersal ABNormal LIMits ALL NOMinal LOW HIGH VOLTage TRANsient ALL OVER UNDer COMBination FREQuency TRANsient EALL OVER UNDer COMBination EMERgency LIMits ALL NOMinal LOW HIGH FREQuency 60 360 400 600 800 GROUp SAC TAC SV
25. DEFine ACQuire ABORt Resets the trigger system to the Idle state Initiates the system for one trigger Initiates a specific numbered sequence Initiates a specific named sequence Sets continuous initialization Sets continuous initialization Triggers the output immediately Sets the trigger delay time Sets the trigger source BUS EXT IMM Sets the synchronous source Sets the synchronous phase reference Triggers the measurement immediately Sets the trigger source BUS EXT TTLT Sets or queries the SEQ1 name Sets or queries the SEQ2 name Sets or queries the SEQ3 name This command resets the measurement and transient trigger systems to the Idle state Any output transient or measurement that is in progress is immediately aborted ABORt also cancels any lists or pulses that may be in process ABORt also resets the WTG bit in the Operation Condition Status register see ABORt is executed at power turn on and upon execution of RCL RST or any implied abort command see List Subsystem Note If INITiate CONTinuous ON has been programmed the trigger subsystem initiates itself immediately after ABORt thereby setting the WTG bit TRIGger DELay not implemented in earlier firmware versions 113 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax ABORt Parameters None Examples ABOR Related Commands INIT HST TRG TRIG INITiate SEQuence INITiate NAME The INITiate commands control the initiation of bot
26. FIX BUS SOUR FREQ SLEW TRIG INF IMM SOUR FREQ TRIG 60Hz SOURIFUNC BUS Table 5 2 factory defined RST states Note RST does not clear any of the status registers or the error queue and does not affect any interface error conditions RST does not affect the data in any of the lists RST sets the trigger system to the Idle state Command Syntax RST Parameters None Related Commands PSC SAV OUTPut PON STATe 122 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 5 9 This command stores the present state of the AC source to a specified location in memory Up to 16 setup states can be stored in nonvolatile memory If a particular state is desired at power on it should be stored in location 0 It then will be recalled at power on if the OUTPut PON STATe command is set to RCLO Use RCL to retrieve instrument states Command Syntax SAV Parameters 0 to 15 Related Commands PSC RST Note that saving settings and transient list information from non volatile memory takes some amount of time as shown in the table below If you develop a test program that uses the RCL or commands insert the amount of delay shown in the table before sending the next command in your program Command RCL 0 RCL n 1 to 15 SAV 0 n n 1 to 15 Execution time 20 msec 40 msec 80 msec 40 msec 5 10 SRE This command sets the condition of the Service Request
27. OUTPut PROTection CLEar This command clears the latch that disables the output when an overvoltage OV overcurrent OC overtemperature or remote inhibit RI fault condition is detected All conditions that generated the fault must be removed before the latch can be cleared The output is then restored to the state it was in before the fault condition occurred Command Syntax OUTPut PROTection CLEar Parameters None Examples OUTP PROT CLE Related Commands OUTP PROT DEL HCL SAV 63 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il OUTPut PROTection DELay This command sets the delay time between the programming of an output change that produces a CL or UNREG status condition and the recording of that condition by the Status Operation Condition register The delay prevents momentary changes in status that can occur during programming from being registered as events by the status subsystem In most cases these temporary conditions are not considered an event and to record them as such would be a nuisance Command Syntax OUTPut PROTection DELay lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 32 MINimum MAXimum Unit S seconds RST Value 100 milliseconds Examples OUTP PROT DEL 75E 1 Query Syntax OUTPut PROTection DELay Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands OUTP PROT CLE HCL SAV OUTPut RI LEVel This command sets the remote inhibit level mode Factory default is LOW which requires a contact closure to open the output relay
28. SCALar CURRent AC Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR AC FETC CURR AC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent ACDC FETCh CURRent ACDC Phase Selectable These queries return the ac and dc components of the rms current being sourced at the output terminals Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent ACDC FETCh SCALar CURRent ACDC Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR ACDC FETC CURR ACDC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum FETCh CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum Phase Selectable These queries return the absolute value of the peak current as sampled over one measurement acquisition of 4096 data points Note that the MEAS format returns the non recurring peak current as in a peak hold reading This value can be cleared with the MEAS CURR AMP RES command The FETC format can be used to obtain the recurring or repetitive peak current this requires the acquisition to be triggered first by either an INIT ACQ or a MEAS command for another paramter e g current followed by the FETC CURR AMPL MAX Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum FETCh SCALar CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR AMPL MAX FETC CURR AMPL MAX Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent AMPLitude RESet FETCh CURRent AMPLitude RESet Phase Selectable These command resets the peak c
29. The DFI is an active high open collector output with internal pull up to 5Vdc The up can be removed by removing W1 on the 7004 716 range relay board Command Syntax Parameters RST Value Examples Query Syntax Returned Parameters Related Commands OUTPut DFI STATe lt bool gt OFFION OFF OUTP DFI1 OUTP DFI OFF OUTPut DFI STATe 0 1 OUTP DFI SOUR 62 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II OUTPut DFI SOURce This command selects the source for DFl events The choices are QUEStionable Questionable summary bit OPERation Operation summary bit ESB Standard Event summary bit RQS Request Service summary bit OFF Never true Command Syntax OUTP DFI SOUR source Parameters QUES OPER ESP RQS OFF RST Value OFF Examples OUTP DFI SOUR OPER Query Syntax OUTPut DFI SOUR Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands OUTP DFI OUTPut PON STATe This command selects the power on state of the AC source The following states can be selected RST Sets the power on state to RST Refer to the RST command as described later in this chapter for more information RCLO Sets the power on state to 0 Refer to the command as described later in this chapter for more information Command Syntax OUTPut PON STATE lt state gt Parameters RST RCLO Examples OUTP PON STAT RST Query Syntax OUTPut PON STATe Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands RST
30. The level can be reversed by setting it to HIGH Once set the RI level setting is retained each time the power source is powered up Note that this command is only implement with firmware revision 1 69 or higher Lower firmware revisions only provide the default LOW setting Command Syntax OUTPut RI LEVel Parameters LOW HIGH RST Value LOW Examples OUTP RI LEV HIGH Query Syntax OUTP RI LEV Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands OUTP OUTP RI MODE OUTPut RI MODE This command selects the mode of operation of the Remote Inhibit protection The following modes can be selected LATChing A TTL low at the RI input latches the output in the protection shutdown state which can only be cleared by OUTPut PROTection CLEar LIVE The output state follows the state of the RI input A TTL low at the RI input turns the output off a TTL high turns the output on OFF The instrument ignores the RI input The RI output state is saved as part of an instrument setup using the SAV command It can be made part of the power on setting if needed The default state is LIVE Command Syntax OUTPut RI MODE lt mode gt Parameters LATChing LIVE OFF RST Value OFF Examples OUTP RI MODE LIVE Query Syntax OUTPut RI MODE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands OUTP PROT CLE OUTP RI LEV 64 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il OUTPut TTLTrg MODE This command sets the operation of the Trigger Out1 signal to either
31. 0 Allocate buffer space 51 Space 4 iBlkSize 256 6 Allow 6 extra bytes for 46384 Send query command using GPIB I F Ctrlr 0 SendGPIB 0 cmd ReceiveGPIB 0 AC_GPIB Adr sl STOPend Process received data If Len sl Then Start at first char after header 44096 If Left sl 1 4 Then iPointer Val Mid s1l 2 1 2 for n and 1 to point to first actual data byte iPointer iPointer 3 For i 0 To iMaxPoints n For 1 0 iBlkSize 1 S s 51 iPointer j 1 Next 7 iPointer iPointer iBlkSize 144 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II Buffer i StringToIEEEFloat s gl bAsciiTransfer Next i End If End If End Sub The required data format conversion from IEEE floating point to single precision floating points is shown in the next section 6 9 2 VB6 Sample Converting IEEE format trace data to floating point Converting the received IEEE floating point format waveform data to a single precision floating point value can be accomplished using the following sample routine Public Function StringToIEEEFloat ByVal sData As String ByVal bAsciiMode As Boolean As bAsciiMode flag is used if data is received as 8 ascii chars representing Hex 0 9 A F If bAsciiMode flag is false then data is process as 4 char representing a byte each Ascii mode is needed for DCBS windows Dim i As Integer Dim j As Integer Dim iChar As Integer Dim expo As Long Dim mantis
32. 0 Returns the measured frequency TEST 1 Returns phase A measured voltage TEST 2 Returns phase B measured voltage TEST 3 Returns phase C measured voltage TEST 4 Returns phase A measured current TEST 5 Returns phase B measured current TEST 6 Returns phase C measured current TEST 7 Returns phase A measured power TEST 8 Returns phase B measured power Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 185 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il SYNTAX DESCRIPTION TEST 9 Returns phase C measured power Measurement commands for three phase units 9023 These commands cannot be combined with other commands in a single message string TST VA Returns phase A measured voltage TST VB Returns phase B measured voltage TST VC Returns phase C measured voltage TST IA Returns phase A measured current TST IB Returns phase B measured current TST IC Returns phase C measured current TST WA Returns phase A measured power TST WB Returns phase B measured power TST WC Returns phase C measured power TST PB Returns phase angle of phase B with respect to phase A TST PC Returns phase angle of phase C with respect to phase A TST FR Returns the measured frequency Table 8 8 ABLE languange synstax ABL option 186 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 3 3 Language Extension The following additional capabilities not part of the ABLE syntax are supported
33. 16 STAT QUES PTR 512 Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable NT Ransition STATus QUEStionable PTRansitiion Returned Parameters cNR1 Register value Related Commands STAT QUES ENAB Bit Position Bit Name not CL not not TO UNR not OCP OV ume uer me fea ea mwem ase 52 pe pe Pe Pt Table 4 5 Bit Configuration of Questionable Instrument Summary Registers OV over voltage protection has tripped OCP over current protection has tripped UNR output is unregulated TO over temperature protection has tripped RI remote inhibit is active Rail loss of input phase voltage detected CL rms rms current limit is active STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary Phase Selectable This command returns the value of the Questionable Event register for a specific output of a three phase AC source The particular output phase must first be selected by INST NSEL The Event register is a read only register which holds latches all events that are passed by the Questionable NTR and or PTR filter Reading the Questionable Event register clears it Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary EVENt Parameters None Returned Parameters lt 1 gt Register Value Examples STAT QUES INST ISUM EVEN Related Commands CLS STAT QUES INST ISUM NTR STAT QUES INST ISUM PTR 102 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary CONDition Phase Selectable This quer
34. 60 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax MEASure SCALar VOLTage HARMonic THD FETCh SCALar VOLTage HARMonic THD Parameters None Examples MEAS VOLT HARM THD FETC VOLT HARM THD Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure THDistortion MODE This command sets the calculation method for THD measurements The distortion calculation is based on the H2 through H50 with the RMS voltage or current in the denominator Note that some definitions of THD use the fundamental component H1 of the voltage or as the denominator Lx Ls units with firmware revision 0 88 or higher can be programmed to use the fundamental component as the denominator instead of the RMS value This mode can only be programmed over the bus by sending the MEAS THD MODE FUND command At power up or after a reset command the mode will revert back to the RMS mode This mode setting is not saved in any of the set up registers Syntax MEASure THDistortion MODE Parameters RMSQuare FUNDamental Examples MEAS THD MODE FUND Query Syntax MEAS THD MODE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands MEAS VOLT HARM THD MEAS CURR HARM THD 61 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 13 Output Subsystem This subsystem controls the main outputs the signal outputs the power on state and the output protection function of the Lx Ls Series Subsystem Syntax OUTPut STATe lt bool gt Enable disable output voltage c
35. B C D E or F MS704 GROup SAC SVF SXF TAC TVF MS704 FREQuency lt numeric value gt MS704 STEP SINGle or CONTinous MS704 TEST CONDition A letter form A to Z or AA to ZZ function of test MS704 FREQuency This command will selects the nominal test frequency For revisions D and E the only available setting is 400 Hz For revision F draft available settings are 60 Hz 360 Hz 400 Hz 600 Hz or 800 Hz This command will only accept values that are consistent with the selected test group Refer to the table below for valid frequency settings by group GROUP Steady State Frequency in Hz SAC 400 TAC 400 SVF 400 360 600 800 TVF 400 360 600 800 SXF 60 Table 8 10 MS704 Steady state frequency by group The nominal frequency selection must be set prior to any test execution Select the correct group first so the frequency selected is indeed available Command Syntax MS704 FREQuency Parameters 60 360 400 600 800 Examples MS704 FREQ 400 Query Syntax MS704 FREQ Returned Parameters lt CRD gt MS704 GROUp This command sets the EUT test group Command Syntax MS704 GROUp Parameters SAC TAC SVF TVF SXF Examples MS704 GROU SAC Query Syntax MS704 GROU Returned Parameters lt CRD gt 205 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il MS704 REVision This command sets the RTCA DO 160 test standard revision to be used The test levels and duration are typicall
36. COMBination ALL This command will run all power fail state combination operation mode tests Command Syntax MS704 POWer FAIL COMBinaton ALL Parameters none Examples MS704 POW FAIL Query Syntax none MS704 POWer FAIL COMBination ONE This command will run the power fail state combination operation mode 1 test Command Syntax MS704 POWer FAIL COMBinaton ONE Parameters none Examples MS704 POW FAIL ONE Query Syntax none MS704 POWer FAIL COMBination I TWO This command will run the power fail state combination operation mode 2 test Command Syntax MS704 POWer FAIL COMBinaton TWO Parameters none Examples MS704 POW FAIL TWO Query Syntax none MS704 POWer FAIL THRee This command will run the power fail state combination operation mode 3 test Command Syntax MS704 POWer FAIL THRee Parameters none Examples MS704 POW FAIL THR Query Syntax none MS704 POWer FAIL PHASe REVersal This command will run the power fail state combination phase reversal test Command Syntax MS704 POWer FAIL PHASe REVersal Parameters none Examples MS704 POW FAIL PHAS REV Query Syntax none 8 7 7 MS704 Transfer State Commands Transfer state tests can be started by sending the MS704 TRAN command MS704 TRANsfer POWer INTerrupt 216 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il This command will run the transfer power interrupt test Command Syntax MS704 TRANsfer POWer INTerrupt Parameters none Examples
37. Event Registers You can use status register programming to determine the operating condition of the AC source at any time For example you may program the AC source to generate an interrupt assert SRQ when an event such as a current limit occurs When the interrupt occurs your program can then act on the event in the appropriate fashion Figure 7 1 shows the status register structure of the AC Source Table 7 2 defines the status bits The Standard Event Status Byte and Service Request Enable registers and the Output Queue perform standard IEEE 488 functions as defined in the IEEE 488 2 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation The Operation Status Questionable Status and Questionable Instrument Isummary Status registers implement functions that are specific to the AC source 7 1 Power On Conditions Refer to the RST command description in chapter 4 Table 5 2 for the power on conditions of the status registers 7 2 Operation Status Group The Operation Status registers record signals that occur during normal operation The group consists of the following registers Condition STAT OPER COND A register that holds real time status of the circuits being monitored It is a read only register PTR Filter STAT OPER PTR lt n gt A positive transition filter that functions as described under STAT OPER NTR PTR commands in chapter 4 It is a read write register NTR Filter STAT OPER NTR n A neg
38. Function Strobe or Trigger mode Factory default is Trigger state which means the OUTP TTLT STAT command is required to generate outputs This mode is compatible with the Agilent HP6834B models In Function Strobe mode an output pulse is generated automatically any time an output parameter such as voltage frequency or phase is programmed The AC source Trigger Out1 signal is available at a SMA connector on the rear of the Lx Ls Series units Command Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg MODE TRIG FSTR Parameters TRIG FSTR RST Value TRIG Examples OUTP TTLT MODE FSTR Query Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg MODE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands OUTP TTLT STAT 65 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II OUTPut TTLTrg STATe This command enables or disables the AC source Trigger Out1 signal which is available at a SMA connector on the rear of the Lx Ls Series units Command Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg STATe lt bool gt Parameters 0 1 OFFION RST Value OFF Examples OUTP TTLT 1 OUTP TTLT OFF Query Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg STATe Returned Parameters 0 1 Related Commands OUTP TTLT SOUR OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce This command selects the signal source for the Trig Out1 signal as follows e BOT Beginning of transient output e EOT End of transient output e LIST Specified by the TTLTrg list When an event becomes true at the selected TTL Trg source a pulse is sent to the SMA connector on the rear of the AC source Command Syntax OUTPut
39. LAN IP address 3 3 5 Socket Port Number Now that a connection has been verified you can develop your application code If you are using one of the Microsoft environments the Winsock protocol which is part of the Windows operating system can be used Similar capabilities are supported on other operating systems To use Winsock your will have to specificy the port number of the power source s LAN interface The port number determines the protocol for the communication The Lx Ls power source uses ASCII characters and instrument SCPI commands for remote control The IANA registered Port number for the Instrument SCPI interface is 5025 TCP Remote port 5025 32 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 3 4 RS232C Serial Interface The RS232C interface has been retained on the Lx Ls Series power source models for backward compatibility with the Series products It functions exactly like it did on the first generation products Note If a USB cable is plugged into the USB interface connector of the power source the RS232 interface will be disabled Remove any USB connection to use the serial port The RS232C interface is factory enabled for all Lx Ls models except those ordered with the optional CLAN interface Models with the CLAN option have the LAN interface enabled and the RS232C port disabled Note If the LAN option is installed jumper W2 on the range relay board Assy P N 7004 716 1 must be installed This jumper m
40. MS704 TRAN Query Syntax none 217 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 8 Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Test Option ABD The ABD option is implemented through the LxGui Windows software provided with each AC power source As such there are SCPI commands that apply to the ABD option Refer to the Avionics Software User Manual P N 4994 971 for more information 8 9 A Airbus A350 00100 1 8 1 Test Option A350 The A350 option is implemented through the LxGui Windows software provided with each AC power source As such there are no SCPI commands that apply to the A350 option Refer to the Avionics Software User Manual CI P N 4994 971 for more information 8 10 Airbus AMD24 Test Option AMD The AMD option is implemented through the LxGui Windows software provided with each AC power source As such there are no SCPI commands that apply to the AMD option Refer to the Avionics Software User Manual P N 4994 971 for more information 8 11 Boeing 787B3 0147 Test Option B787 The B787 option is implemented through the LxGui Windows software provided with each power source As such there are no SCPI commands that apply to the B787 option Refer to the Avionics Software User Manual CI P N 4994 971 for more information 218 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Appendix A SCPI Command tree SCPI Common Commands CLS ESE value ESE ESR IDN OPC OPC OPT PSC lt bool gt PSC
41. NTR Negative Transition and PTR Positive Transition registers to be set or read for a specific output of a three phase AC source The particular output phase must first be selected by INST NSEL The NTR and PTR registers serve as polarity filters between the Questionable Enable and Questionable Event registers to cause the following actions e When a bit of the Questionable NTR register is set to 1 then 1 to 0 transition of the corresponding bit of the Questionable Condition register causes that bit in the Questionable Event register to be set e When a bit of the Questionable PTR register is set to 1 then a 0 to 1 transition of the corresponding bit in the Questionable Condition register causes that bit in the Questionable Event register to be set e If the same bits in both NTR and PTR registers are set to 1 then any transition of that bit at the Questionable Condition register sets the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register e If the same bits in both NTR and PTR registers are set to 0 then no transition of that bit at the Questionable Condition register can set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register 103 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Note Setting a bit in the PTR or NTR filter can of itself generate positive or negative events in the corresponding Questionable Event register Command Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary NTRansition lt NRf gt STATus QUEStionable INSTrum
42. SCALar CURRent DC Returns dc component of the current Returns ac rms current Returns ac dc rms current AMPLitude MAX Returns non recurring peak current RESet Clear the non recurring peak current CREStfactor Returns current crestfactor HARMonic AMPLitude lt n gt Returns amplitude of the Nth harmonic of current PHASe lt n gt Returns phase of the Nth harmonic of current THD Returns of total harmonic distortion of current NEUTral DC Returns neutral current 3 only Returns neutral rms current 3 only Returns neutral rms current 3 phase only HARMonic AMPLitude n Returns neutral current harmonic amplitude PHASe n Returns neutral current harmonic phase RMSQ FUND Sets THD calculation to either RMS or Fundamental mode MEASure CURRent FETCh CURRent Phase Selectable These queries return the dc component of the output current being sourced at the output terminals Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent DC FETCh SCALar CURRent DC Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR FETC CURR Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent AC FETCh CURRent AC Phase Selectable These queries return the ac component rms current being sourced at the output terminals 51 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent AC FETCh
43. SCPI messages consist of one or more message units ending in a message terminator The terminator is not part of the syntax but implicit in the way your programming language indicates the end of a line such as a newline or end of line character 2 5 1 The Message Unit The simplest SCPI command is a single message unit consisting of a command header or keyword followed by a message terminator ABORt lt newline gt VOLTage lt newline gt The message unit may include a parameter after the header The parameter usually is numeric but it can be a string VOLTage 20 lt newline gt VOLTage MAX lt newline gt 2 5 2 Combining Message Units The following command message is briefly described here with details in subsequent paragraphs Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Data Message Unit Query Indicator Headers VOLT LEV 80 PROT 88 CURR lt NL gt Header Separator Terminator Message quos Root Specifier Separator Figure 2 2 Command Message Structure The basic parts of the above message are Message Component Example Headers VOLT LEV PROT CURR Header Separator The colon in VOLT LEV Data 80 88 Data Separator The space in VOLT 80 and PROT 88 Message Units VOLT LEV 80 PROT 88 CURR Message Unit Separator The semicolons in VOLT LEV 80 and PROT 88 Root Specifier The colon in PROT 88 CURR Query Indicator The question mark in CURR Message Terminator T
44. SHAP CSIN SOUR FUNC SHAP MODE SOUR FUNC SHAP TRIG SOURj LIST FREQ SLEW SOUR LIST FREQ SLEW POIN SOUR LIST PHAS SOUR LIST PHAS POIN SOUR LIST SHAP SOUR LIST SHAP POIN SOUR LIST STEP SOUR LIST TTLT SOUR LIST TTLT POIN SOUR LIST VOLT OFFS SOUR LIST VOLT OFFS POIN SOUR LIST VOLT SLEW SOUR LIST VOLT SLEW POIN SOUR PHAS MODE SOUR PHAS TRIG SOUR VOLT ALC STAT SOUR VOLT ALC SOUR SOUR VOLT OFFS IMM SOUR VOLT OFFS MODE SOUR VOLT OFFS TRIG SOUR VOLT SENS SOUR SOUR VOLT SLEW MODE SOUR VOLT SLEW TRIG SYST CONF SYST CONF NOUT SYST ETIM SYST LOC SYST REM SYST RWL TRIG SEQ2 SYNC PHAS TRIG SEQ DEF 225 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series Il Appendix C Error Messages This appendix gives the error numbers and descriptions that are returned by the AC power source Error numbers are returned in two ways e Error numbers are displayed on the front panel e Error numbers and messages are read back with the SYSTem ERRor query SYSTem ERRor returns the error number into a variable and returns two parameters an NR1 and a string When errors occur the Standard Event Status register records them as shown in the following table Code Error Type 7 3 300 thru 399 Device dependent or Note that errors over 800 do not set the ESR 1 thru 799 Standard Event Status register error bits The following table lists the errors
45. Syntax SOURce LIST MODE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST STEP LIST PHASe Phase Selectable This phase selectable command sets the sequence of phase list points The phase points are given in the command parameters which are separated by commas The order in which the points are entered determines the sequence in which they are output when a list is triggered Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied ABORT Command Syntax SOURce LIST PHASe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Parameters 360 through 360 Examples LIST PHAS 90 120 135 Query Syntax SOURce LIST PHAS Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands LIST PHAS POIN LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST STEP LIST PHASe POINts This query returns the number of points specified in LIST PHASe Note that it returns only the total number of points not the point values Query Syntax SOURce LIST PHASe POINts Returned Parameters NR3 Example IST PHAS POIN Related Commands IST FREQ LIST DWEL LIST SHAPe This command sets the sequence of the waveform shape entries The order in which the shapes are given determines the sequence in which the list of shape will be output when a list transient is triggered Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied ABORt The following shapes may be specified SINusoid A sinewave is output SQUare A squarewave is output CSINusoid The ou
46. TRACe keyword instead 111 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II TRACe CATalog DATA CATalog These commands return a list of defined waveform names The list includes both pre defined waveforms such as SINusoid SQUare and CSINusoid as well as any user defined waveforms Query Syntax TRACe CATalog DATA CATalog Returned Parameters lt SRD gt Example TRAC CAT Related Commands TRAC DATA TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP TRACe DEFine DATA DEFine These commands define a new waveform with the name waveform name and allocates storage for its data The waveform name can then be referenced by the TRACe DATA command to define its data values See section 6 10 for additional information on using the TRAC DEF and TRAC DATA commands An optional second argument is accepted for SCPI compatibility although it serves no useful purpose in the AC source The second argument can be the name of an existing waveform or the number of points in the trace When a second name is sent the data from the first waveform name is copied to the second When the number of points in the trace is sent only the number 1024 is accepted Command Syntax TRACe DEFine waveform name waveform name 1024 DATA DEFine waveform name waveform gt 1024 Parameters waveform name Example TRAC DEF flattop Related Commands TRAC DATA TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP TRACe DELete DATA DELete These commands delete the user defined waveform table with
47. TTLTrg SOURce lt source gt Parameters BOT EOT LIST 5 Value BOT Examples OUTP TTLT SOUR LIST Query Syntax OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands OUTP TTLT 66 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 14 Power On Subsystem This subsystem controls the specific configuration settings at power on Most power on settings are determined by the power on register recall state using the OUTPut PON STATe command Some aspects are not part of a register however and must be controlled using the PONS commands Subsystem Syntax SOURce PONSetup CLOCK STD MAST AUX PEAK CURRent PROTection Disables peak current protection RELay HOLD Sets output off relay open delay in seconds SYNChronize SOURce EXTernal LINE PONSetup CLOCk This command is used to set the clock and lock mode at power up It is factory set and should not be changed unless the configuration has been modified in the field Units with the LKM option are fixed to MAST mode Units with the LKS option can be set to either STANdalone or AUX When set to AUX the LKS unit will power up in external clock mode When set to STANDalone the LKS unit will power up in internal clock mode The LKM unit always powers up in internal clock mode It s clock state cannot be changed Command Syntax PONSetup CLOCk Parameters STANdalone MASTer AUXiliary Examples PONS CLOC Query Syntax PONS CLOC Returned Parameters lt CRD gt
48. This 12 2 2 The SCPI Commands and Messages ssssssssssssesseseee eene enne nnns sene 12 2 3 USING QUEFIGS iere inet ee IR BENE UE ee tend ae 15 2 4 Co pled Gomimands eere dederint ede ete eie ede 15 25 Structure of a SCPI MeSSage ote eet oi edo ea etre ads 15 26 SCPI Data etes Ion cet beat d neta liebe esp alee ieee deve 18 3 System Considerations 1eerrie e anaa raoa deoa Cera asa anne Ca aar cn 20 3 1 IEEE 488 Interfacing 20 3 2 USB Interfaces x rit et Ee 21 3 9 LAN teer T eiim etel t ein on edite re a epi rm edd 28 3 4 RS292G Serial Interface oio eie m eee teet nte inde nete e i e pend 33 3 5 Instrument Drivers and Application Software 34 4 SCPI Command Reference eese 35 Introduction coit oen Met eld een eg nde eet ds 35 4 2 Subsystem nass nnne entes nsns sss 36 4 35 Calibration SUDSySTem cni e eed dedere ti 37 d oie es EO 39 4 5 Display SUBSYSte 40 4 6 Instrument 42 Lirit SUDSySIUOTTIo eret couette
49. WIDTh 89 Table 4 2 PULSe HOLD DCYCle parameters esses enne nennen snnt nnn neni 89 Table 4 3 Bit Configuration of Status Operation 15 99 Table 4 4 Bit Configuration of Questionable 100 Table 4 5 Bit Configuration of Questionable Instrument Summary Registers 102 Table 5 1 Bit Configuration of Standard Event Status Enable 119 Table 5 2 factory defined RST 122 Table 5 3 Bit Configuration of Status Byte Register 124 Table 6 1 Command Processing Times sse nennen 149 Table 7 1 Operation Status registers 2 2 2221 11 enne ennt ettet sn nnn ens 150 Table 7 2 Bit Configurations of Status Registers 152 Table 7 3 Questionable Status enne nnns 153 Table 7 4 Questionable Instrument Isummary Status registers sse 154 Table 8 1 APE to SCPI mode change commands cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeseaes 163 Table 8 2 APE versus SCPI equivalent power initialization 165 Table 8 3 APE lan
50. buffer is determined by SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts This command has two optional parameters The first one may be used to specify the number of 256 data sample blocks to transfer Valid parameter values are from 1 through 16 The second parameter may be used to specify the offset in number of 256 data sample blocks from which to 45 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II start the data transfer Valid offset values are from 0 thorugh 15 If both parameters are omitted all 16 blocks are transferred starting from offset 0 first block Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CURRent DC lt n gt lt n gt FETCh ARRay CURRent DC lt n gt lt n gt Parameters Optional block and offset parameters lt n gt lt n gt Where the first value lt n gt is the number of 256 sample blocks to transfer and the second value lt n gt is the first block offset to start with Number of blocks is from 1 to 16 offset is from 0 to 15 Examples MEAS ARR CURR FETC ARR CURR 4 0 Returned Parameters 4096 NR3 values Related Commands INST NSEL SENS SWE MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic Phase Selectable These queries return an array of harmonic amplitudes of output current in rms amperes The first value returned is the dc component the second value is the fundamental frequency and so on up to the 50th harmonic Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is
51. for formatting the two lines by padding the first line with spaces as needed It is not necessary to pad out the complete 32 characters as the power source will fill any remaining character positions with spaces automatically Command Syntax DISPlay WINDow TEXT DATA lt display_string gt Parameters lt display string gt RST Value null string Examples DISP TEXT DO TEST1 Query Syntax DISPlay WINDow MODE Returned Parameters SRD the last programmed string Related Commands DISP DISP TEXT 41 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 4 6 Instrument Subsystem This subsystem programs the three phase output capability of the AC Power Source Subsystem Syntax INSTrument COUPIe ALL NONE Couple all phases for programming NSELect lt n gt Select the output phase to program 1 2 3 SELect output Select the output phase to program OUTP1 OUTP2 OUTP3 INSTrument COUPle In a three phase power source it is convenient to set parameters of all three output phases simultaneously with one programming command When INST COUP ALL is programmed sending a command to any phase will result in that command being sent to all three phases INSTrument COUPle only affects the operation of subsequent commands It does not by itself immediately affect the AC source s output The commands that are affected by INSTrument COUPle are those with the designation Phase Selectable INSTrument COUPle has no affect on queries The
52. function is enabled and the AC source exceeds the programmed level then the output is disabled and the Questionable Condition status register OC bit is set see Chapter 7 An overcurrent condition can be cleared with OUTPut PROTection CLEar after the cause of the condition is removed Use OUTP PROT DEL to prevent momentary current limit conditions caused by programmed output changes from tripping the over current protection Use CURR PROT DEL to hold off tripping the output due to temporary overload conditions Command Syntax SOURce CURRent PROTection STATe lt bool gt Parameters 0 1 RST Value OFF Examples CURR PROT STAT 0 CURR PROT STAT OFF Query Syntax SOURce CURRent PROTection STATe Returned Parameters 0 1 Related Commands OUTP PROT CLE CURR PROT DEL 72 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 17 Source Subsystem Frequency This subsystem programs the output frequency of the AC source Subsystem Syntax SOURce FREQuency CW IMMediate n Sets the frequency MODE mode Sets frequency mode FIX STEP PULS LIST SENS EXT SLEW IMMediate n INFinity Sets the frequency slew rate MODE mode Sets frequency slew mode FIX STEP PULS LIST TRIGgered n INFinity Sets the triggered frequency slew rate TRIGgered n Sets the triggered frequency FREQuency This command sets the frequency of the output waveform Command Syntax SOURce FREQuency CW IMMediate lt NRf gt
53. iaa i aa rta 89 PULSe PERIOd is 90 1 90 Q QUONCS danse eA 16 R rero T 18 ROOL ee I asthe 14 root SPOCIPION 42222 18 RPV stata 96 RS232C Cable itte ev eon 34 5 13 Command 14 13 message 16 program 13 response 13 ET 16 Eri bete 125 5 5 70 SENSe SW Eep OFFSet POINIts 70 SENSe SWEep TINTerval 71 70 enya 17 STATus OPERation CONDition 100 STATus OPERation ENABle 100 STATus OPERation NTR STATus OPERation PTR 100 100 99 STATus QUEStionable CONDition 102 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 102 STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary CONDiition 104 STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary ENABIG
54. inboard side of the output disconnect relay EXTernal This senses the output voltage at the user s sense terminals which allows remote voltage sensing at the load Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage SENSe SOURce lt source gt SOURce VOLTage ALC SOURce lt source gt Parameters INTernal EXTernal RST Value INTernal Examples VOLT SENS SOUR INT Query Syntax SOURce VOL Tage SENSe SOURce Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands VOLT ALC SOUR EXT Note The VOLT ALC SOUR command is an alias for the VOLT SENS SOUR command Both perform the same function This is done for backward compatability with the Agilent 6834B VOLTage SLEW This command sets the slew rate for all programmed changes in the ac rms output voltage level of the AC source A parameter of MAXimum or INFinity will set the slew to its maximum possible rate The SCPI representation for INFinity is 9 9E37 This command does not affect the rate at which programmed dc offset changes occur Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage SLEW IMMediate NRf NFinity Parameters 1E 3 to 9 9E37 INFinity MINimum MAXimum Unit V S volts per second RST Value INFinity Examples VOLT SLEW 1 VOLT SLEW MAX VOLT SLEW INF Query Syntax SOURce VOLTage SLEW IMMediate Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands VOLT SLEW MODE VOLT SLEW TRIG 96 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II VOLTage SLEW MODE Phase Selectable This command determines how the output v
55. iterato its 83 5 84 LIST STEP tere eris 84 PISTETTISDEQ et eee tmb ees 84 LIST TTLTrg POINts sese 84 8 85 85 51 85 LIST VOLTage SLEW POINtS 85 M MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe 47 MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic 47 MEASure ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic inset c tme 48 MEPE ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic a tee 48 235 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series Il MEASure ARRay CURRent NEUTral 47 MEASure ARRay CURRent 46 MEASure ARRay MODe 48 MEASure ARRay VOLTage HARMonic 51 MEASure ARRay VOLTage 50 52 MEASure CURRent ACDC 53 MEASure CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum 53 MEASure CURRent AMPLitude RESet 53 MEASure CURRent CREStfactor 53 MEASure CURRent HARMonic PHASe 54 MEASure CURRent HARMonic THD 54 MEASure CURRent HARMonic 54 MEASure CURRent NEUTral AC 55 MEASure CURRe
56. not working Over voltage prot trip Over voltage Check output voltage for correct RMS detected on output value Peak current prot trip Peak current limit Peak current exceeded Could be exceeded caused by switching EUT on or off Frequency error Frequency error Correct frequency was not measured during self test during self test May be result of 801 error 825 826 27 8 Phase error Self test error phase Correct phase angle was not angle measured during self test May be result of 801 error Dc component exceed Too much DC Check waveform programming limit content in loaded ARB waveform Table 8 11 SCPI error codes and messages Appendix D iL Series HP6834B Compatability 231 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II This appendix summarizes difference between the old iL Series and HP6834B AC power sources and the Lx Series with respect to bus programming The Ls Series is not recommended as a replacement for iL HP6834B power sources The iL Series AC source products used an Agilent designed DSP controller board This controller is identical to the one used in the Agilent 6834B products Both product lines have been discontinued The Lx Series uses a newer AMETEK Programmable Power designed DSP controller Every effort was made to maintain backward compatibility with the iL HP series over the bus However some inherent hardware differences between the two controller designs make it impossible to m
57. of the output voltage being sourced at the output terminals Query Syntax MEASure SCALar VOLTage DC FETCh SCALar VOLTage DC Parameters None Examples MEAS VOLT FETC VOLT Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure VOLTage AC FETCh VOLTage AC Phase Selectable These queries return the ac rms voltage being sourced at the output terminals Query Syntax MEASure SCALar VOLTage AC FETCh SCALar VOLTage AC Parameters None Examples MEAS VOLT AC FETC VOLT AC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure VOLTage ACDC FETCh VOLTage ACDC Phase Selectable These queries return the ac or dc rms voltage being sourced at the output terminals 59 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax MEASure SCALar VOLTage ACDC FETCh SCALar VOLTage ACDC Parameters None Examples MEAS VOLT ACDC FETC VOLT ACDC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure VOLTage HARMonic FETCh VOLTage HARMonic Phase Selectable These queries return the rms amplitude of the Nth harmonic of output voltage The parameter is the desired harmonic number Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc component A value of 1 returns the fundamental output frequency Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent o
58. output frequency is controlled with the FREQuency command To set the output frequency to 50 Hz use FREQuency 50 Voltage and Frequency Slew Rates Voltage Slew The AC source has the ability to control the slew rate of ac amplitude and frequency changes This can be used to generate ramps or to protect sensitive loads To set the voltage slew rate to 20 volts per second use VOLTage SLEW 20 Actual voltage range values may differ from those shown here based on Model Lx or Ls and configuration options STD HV or EVH Use Limit or Max query to determine actual voltage range values 127 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II At RST the slew rate is set to INFinity which means that ac voltage changes occur at the fastest possible slew rate The slew rate applies to programmed changes in ac output amplitude while the unit is operating in fixed mode Amplitude changes made by the step pulse and list transients are controlled by the same rules that apply to all other functions that are subject to transient control See Programming Transient Outputs Output voltage changes caused by the OUTPut STATe command by a protection feature disabling the output or as a result of load changes are not subject to this slew rate control Frequency Slew The AC source also has the ability to control the slew rate of frequency changes To set the frequency slew rate to 30 Hz per second use FREQuency SLEW 30 At RST the slew rate i
59. over 11 000 colleagues working at more than 80 manufacturing facilities and more than 80 sales and service centers in the United States and around the world Trademarks AMETEK is a registered trademark of AMETEK Inc Other trademarks registered trademarks and product names are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for identification purposes only Notice of Copyright Lx Ls Series II AC Power Source Programming Manual 2010 AMETEK Programmable Power Inc All rights reserved Exclusion for Documentation UNLESS SPECIFICALLY AGREED TO IN WRITING AMETEK PROGRAMMABLE POWER INC MAKES WARRANTY AS THE ACCURACY SUFFICIENCY OR SUITABILITY OF ANY TECHNICAL OR OTHER INFORMATION PROVIDED IN ITS MANUALS OR OTHER DOCUMENTATION b ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR LOSSES DAMAGES COSTS OR EXPENSES WHETHER SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL WHICH MIGHT ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION THE USE OF ANY SUCH INFORMATION WILL BE ENTIRELY AT THE USER S RISK AND c REMINDS YOU THAT IF THIS MANUAL IS IN ANY LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH ALTHOUGH STEPS HAVE BEEN TAKEN TO MAINTAIN THE ACCURACY OF THE TRANSLATION THE ACCURACY CANNOT BE GUARANTEED APPROVED AMETEK CONTENT IS CONTAINED WITH THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION WHICH IS POSTED AT WWW PROGRAMMABLEPOWER COM Date and Revision March 2011 Revision S Part Number 7004 981 Contact Inform
60. returns the maximum available output frequency This value determines the minimum frequency available Query Syntax LIMit FREQuency LOW Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples LIM FREQ LOW Related Commands LIM FREQ HIGH LIMit PHASe Query form returns the phase configuration setting This value determines the phase mode of operation according to the table below Setting Operation 0 Single phase mode 120 Three phase mode Determines relative phase angle between phases A 43 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II and 01 02 and 03 If the MODE field is set standard on Lx Series optional on Ls Series the AC source can operate in both 1 and 3 phase modes Other Any value other than 0 or 120 indicates 2 phase configuration with phase angle between A and B set to value shown Query Syntax LIMit PHASe Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples LIM PHAS Related Commands SYST CONF NOUT LIMit VOLTage HIGH Query form returns the maximum available output voltage for the high voltage range This value determines the maximum AC RMS voltage available using a sinusoidal waveform Note that this is not the same as the available maximum voltage which is a function crest factor of the voltage waveform To query the maximum available voltage use the VOLT MAX command Query Syntax LIMit VOLTage HIGH Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples LIM VOLT HIGH Related Commands LIM V
61. set the voltage and frequency to the minimum level for the emergency operation Command Syntax DO160 EMERgency VOLT_FREQ MINimum Parameters none Examples DO160 EMER VOLT_FREQ MIN Query Syntax none DO160 EMERgency VOLT_FREQ MAXimum This command will set the voltage and frequency to the maximum level for the emergency operation Command Syntax DO160 EMERgency VOLT FREQ MAXimum Parameters none Examples DO160 EMER VOLT FREQ MAX Query Syntax none DO160 EMERgency VOLTage UNBalance This command will unbalance the voltage level for each phase to the emergency high and low operating voltage of each phase This test is valid only for three phase AC source Command Syntax DO160 EMERgency VOLTage UNBalance Parameters none Examples DO160 EMER VOLT UNB Query Syntax none 192 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 4 4 DO160 Abnormal Test Commands DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MINimum This command will set the voltage to the minimum level for the abnormal operation Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MINimum Parameters none Examples DO160 ABN VOLT MIN Query Syntax none DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MAXimum This command will set the voltage to the maximum level for the abnormal operation Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MAXimum Parameters none Examples DO160 ABN VOLT MAX Query Syntax none DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNDer This command will set the voltage to the under voltage level for the abnormal operatio
62. terminator after query CP T NS o error No errors in queue errors in queue Non volatile RAM Controller failure n AMETEK service department CONFIG section during Self test at service programmablepower com checksum failed 3 Non volatile RAM CAL Controller failure Contact AMETEK service department section checksum failed during Self test at service programmablepower com 4 Non volatile RAM Controller failure Contact AMETEK service department WAVEFORM section during Self test at service programmablepower com 228 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series Il checksum failed 10 Ram self test Controller failure Contact AMETEK service department during Self test at service programmablepower com Voltage self test error No 1 A amplifier in Contact AMETEK service department output 1 Master source has no at service programmablepower com output during Self test i Voltage self test error No 2 B amplifier in Contact AMETEK service department output 2 Master source has no at service programmablepower com output during Self test Voltage self test error No 3 C amplifier in Contact AMETEK service department output 3 Master source has no at service programmablepower com output during Self test AR wo Current self test error No 1 A amplifier in Contact AMETEK service department output 1 Aux Source has no at service programmablepower com output duri
63. the ASCII Line Feed LF Carriage Return CR followed by Line Feed may also be used for EOS The End or Identify EOI IEEE 488 message END will also be recognized The END message is sent by setting the IEEE 488 End or Identify line true with the last data byte 8 2 17 Group Execute Trigger GET The trigger mode is enabled when the mnemonic TRG is added to a setup string The trigger command may be inserted anywhere in the string When the mnemonic is detected it will delay execution of the new setup values until the GPIB Device Trigger is sent by the bus controller A GPIB Device Trigger will also terminate a programmed ramp or other program The following setup string will recall the values from register 9 and delay execution until the GET message is received Note GET is the abbreviation for the GPIB Group Execute Trigger message and does not represent a series of ASCII characters REC9 TRG 182 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 3 ABLE Command Language Atlas Based Language Extension The ABLE Atlas Based Language Extension command language syntax is available on Ls Series models Firmware revision must be 1 61 or higher The ABEL language provides backward compatibility with Elager Series 9012 single phase PIP9012 and Series 9023 PIP9023 three phase programmable controllers This option is bundled on the Ls Series with the GPIB interface option If the GPIB options is present units of similar power and voltage
64. the USB interface to Windows XP Windows Vista PC the presence of a new USB device will be detected Windows will display a dialog after a short delay prompting the user to install the USB device drivers California Instruments CD Browser Rev 1 5 Select Model Series 2003RP AV Manuals Application Notes LAN Ulilties GUI Software Instrument Drivers 3 IP Config Utility i USB Utilities Select the Win16 or Win32 version USB to COM winxP 20 Avionics Software s User Manual all AC Pow AC Loads Windows 98 2000 32 bit version 309110 Series 804BL Series Calibrator Flicker Calihrater 21 lt A Display Product List Execute Selection Help fl Close Install USB to Comm Redirector 6 5 9 0 Program 10 1 2008 12 44 58 PM On the CIC496 CD browser select USB to COM WinXP Vista32 select GUI Software tab and click Execute Selection to complete the USB driver installation by selecting Next Next Install then Finish Close CD browser and restart computer This driver will allow access to the AC source USB interface using a virtual COM port Many programming environments support RS232 access but not USB The USB to COM virtual port driver is distributed on the CIC496 CD ROM 21 P rogramming Manual USB Device Driver installation Lx Ls Series Il Plug in USB cable to power soure turn on power soure When the Found New Hardwar
65. the name waveform name and makes its memory available for other waveforms Command Syntax TRACe DELete NAME waveform name DATA DELete NAME waveform name Parameters waveform name Example TRAC DEL flattop Related Commands TRAC DATA TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP TRACe DELete ALL DATA DELete ALL These commands delete all user defined waveforms in the data table and makes the entire waveform memory available Command Syntax TRACe DELete ALL DATA DELete ALL Parameters none Example TRAC DEL ALL Related Commands TRAC DATA TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP 112 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 26 Trigger Subsystem This subsystem controls the triggering of the AC source See chapter 6 7 under Triggering Output Changes for an explanation of the Trigger Subsystem The INITiate commands control the initialization of both the transient and measurement trigger systems The trigger subsystem must first be enabled using the INITiate commands or no triggering action will occur Subsystem Syntax ABORt INITiate IMMediate SEQuence 1 3 NAME TRANSient ACQuire CONTinuous SEQuence 1 bool NAME TRANsient bool TRIGger SEQuence1 TRANsient IMMediate lt gt SOURcCe source SEQuence SYNCronize SOURce PHAse IMMediate PHASe lt n gt SEQuence3 ACQuire IMMediate SOURCce source SEQuence1 DEFine TRANsient SEQuence2 DEFine SYNChronize SEQuence3
66. this location in the search C Program Files California Instruments USB VCP Dri Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware For Windows Vista OS browse to the following location C Program Files California Instruments USB VCP Drivers Vista 32 bits 23 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II For Windows XP OS browse to the following location C Program Files California Instruments USB VCP Drivers XP 32 bits Select Browse My Computer C Prgram Files California Instrumnets USB VCP Driver WinXP 32bit then select OK See picture below for detail Browse For Folder Select the Folder that contains drivers For your hardware C3 ssMxGui E C3 ssssCTSMXL Trial C3 USB VCP Drivers vista 32 bits O Vista 64 bits xP 32 bits O XP 64 bits C3 wawwCTSMxH C3 5 3 xDUALMXDCGui xxIPCONFIG lt view any subfolders click plus sign above Cancel The USB device drivers have not been Windows XP Windows Vista Logo certified Due to the limited distribution of these drivers this is unlikely to be done This Logo certification has no bearing on the functionality or legitimacy of this device driver so you can ignore this message Click the Continue Anyway
67. volt resolution To query the measured Current TLK CUR CUR may be used as an argument to the header TLK with an A B or C extension When used as an argument it will set up the AC Power System to measure the output current in amps To query the measured Power TLK PWR PWR may be used as an argument to the header TLK with an A B or C extension When used as an argument it will set up the AC Power System to measure the output power in watts To query the measured Power Factor TLK PWF PWF be used as an argument to the header with an A B or C extension When used as an argument it will set up the AC Power System to measure the output power factor from 0 to 1 000 To query the measured Apparent Power TLK APW APW may be used as an argument to the header TLK with an A B or C extension When used as an argument it will set up the AC Power System to measure the Apparent Power output in VA To query the measured Frequency TLK FQM FQM may be used as an argument to the header TLK There are no extensions for this argument When is used as an argument it will set up the AC Power System to measure the output frequency in hertz To query the measured Phase Angle TLK PZM PZM may be used as an argument with an extension A B or C for the header TLK When used as an argument PZM will set up the AC Power System to measure the phase angle of phase B and C relative to phase A The measurement is made at the Exte
68. will return the internal ambient temperature of the power source in degrees Celsius Command Syntax SYSTem TEMPerature Parameters none Example SYST TEMP SYSTem VERSion This query returns the SCPI version number to which the AC source complies The returned value is of the form YYYY V where YYYY represents the year and V is the revision number for that year Query Syntax SYSTem VERSion Parameters None Returned Parameters lt NR2 gt Example SYST VERS 110 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 25 Trace Subsystem Commands This subsystem programs the output waveform of the 3000Lx and the 4500Lx Two waveform commands are available TRACe and DATA These commands are interchangeable they both perform the same function Subsystem Syntax TRACe DATA CATalog Return list of defined waveforms DATA waveform names n n Assign values to a waveform DEFine waveform name waveform name 1024 Create and name new waveform DELete NAME waveform name Delete waveform to free its memory ALL Deletes all user defined waveforms at once TRACe DATA These commands set the values of a user defined waveform table The first parameter is the name of a waveform that was previously defined with TRACe DEFine Following the name are 1024 data points that define the relative amplitudes of exactly one cycle of the waveform The first data point defines the relative amplitude that will be output
69. with the VOLTage RANGe This means that the maximum current limit that can be programmed at a given time depends on the voltage range setting in which the unit is presently operating Refer to Section 6 3 under Coupled Commands for more information To determine the maximum available current use the curr max query Command Syntax SOURce CURRent L EVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to max available current Unit A rms amperes RST 1 Examples CURR 5 0 CURR LEV 5 0 Query Syntax SOURce CURRent L EVel IMMediate AMPLitude Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands CURR PROT STAT VOLT RANG CURRent PROTection DELay This command holds off the over current trip of the output voltage for the time specified Default value at RST is 0 1 sec The range is from 0 1 to 5 000 secs and can be queried with the CURR PROT DEL MIN CURR PROT DEL MAX commands Command Syntax SOURce CURRent PROTection DELay lt NRf gt Parameters 0 100 to 5 000 MINimum MAXimum Unit S seconds RST Value 0 100 Examples CURR PROT DEL 1 5 Query Syntax SOURce CURRent PROTection DELay CURRent PROTection DELay Min CURRent PROTection DELay Max Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands CURR PROT STAT 71 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il CURRent PROTection STATe This command enables or disables the AC source overcurrent OC protection function If the overcurrent protection
70. 16 32 32 n u 6 7 PON 128 128 OPERATION STATUS CONDITION PTR NTR EVENT ENABLE a fies RQS CAL 0 GENERATION nu 14 wTa 5 nu 6 15 Figure 7 1 Status Register Model 151 P rogramming Manual E 0 merece computing new cal consens s tV The outputvotage regulated oo Questionable and Questionable Instrument Isummary Status Groups U The overcurrent protection circuit has tripped E A 3 Rai Loss ofinputphase voltage detected 12 13 i Summary of QUES INST ISUM registers Standard Event Status Group o lt m Device dependent error 2 p PON Status Byte and Service Request Enable Registers 3 QUES Questionable status summary bit A Operation complete B Event Status Summary bit Master Status Summary bit Request Service bit 7 OPER Operation status summary bit Table 7 2 Bit Configurations of Status Registers R P Message Available summary bit Lx Ls Series Il 152 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 7 3 Questionable Status Group The Questionable Status registers record signals that indicate abnormal operation of the AC source As shown in Figure 7 1 the group consists of the same type of registers as the Status Operation group PTR Filter NTR Filter STAT QUES COND STAT QUES PTR lt n gt STAT QUES NTR lt n gt STAT QUES EVEN STAT QUES ENAB lt n gt A register
71. 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as 0 Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic AMPLitude FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic AMPLitude Parameters None Examples MEAS ARR CURR HARM FETC ARR CURR HARM Returned Parameters 51 values Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe Phase Selectable These queries return an array of harmonic phases of output current in degrees referenced to the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component The first value returned is the dc component always returned as 0 degrees phase the second value is the fundamental frequency and so on up to the 50th harmonic Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as 0 Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe lt NRf gt FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe lt NRf gt Parameters None Examples MEAS ARR CURR HARM PHAS FETC ARR CURR HARM PHAS Returned Parameters 51 NR3 values Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure ARRay CURRent NEUTral FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTral These queries return an array containing the
72. 3 C hardware will be tested as a result If the power source is a Ls 1 single phase only configuration the selftest can only be run in single phase mode Note The following settings must be in effect before sending the TST Command OUTP 0 Output relay must be open INST NSEL ALL FUNC SIN On all Lx models and Ls models with the ADV option it is required to set the waveform for all three phases to SIN sinewave VOLT RANG MIN The LOW voltage range 135 156 or 200 must be selected VOLT ALC ON The ALC mode must be set to ON Note The selftest is always performed at 400 Hz 115 Vac This is required to obtain the correct internal test current based on the buit in selftest loads However the output relay is open during the selftest and no output is present on the output terminals during the selftest At the end of the selftest the output relay remains open and the voltage is set to OV The frequence remains set to 400 Hz on Ls Lx models with firmware revisions 0 97 or lower On Lx Ls models with firmware revision 0 98 or higher the programmed frequency will return to the value set before execution of the selftest command 124 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 5 14 Query Syntax TST Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt 0 indicates the AC source has passed selftest Nonzero indicates an error code WAI This command instructs the AC source not to process any further commands until all pending operations are complete
73. 32C only An optional GPIB interface GPIB option and Ethernet interface LAN option is available Note Both interfaces use the SCPI command syntax as described in the programming manual e The Lx Series provides both three phase and single phase output modes which can be selected from the front panel or over the bus Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II e The Ls Series provides either three phase 3 models or single phase 1 models Three phase Ls Series sources may optionally be equipped with the MODE option which provides the same phase mode switching as the Lx Series 1 3 Manual organization and format All user documentation for AMETEK Programmable Power power sources is provided on CDROM in electronic format Adobe Portable Document Format The required Adobe PDF viewer is supplied on the same CDROM This manual may be printed for personal use if a hardcopy is desired To request a hardcopy from AMETEK Programmable Power contact customer service at service programmablepower com There will be an additional charge for printed manuals This manual contains sections on programming the Lx or Ls Series over the bus The Lx Series is equipped with GPIB USB and RS232C interfaces The Ls Series is equipped with a USB and RS232C interface An optional GPIB interface can be specified at the time of order Refer to the Lx Ls Series User manual for information on using the remote control interface and command syntax The user manu
74. 4 Programming Output Transients Output transients are used to e Synchronize output changes with a particular phase of the voltage waveform e Synchronize output changes with internal or external trigger signals e Simulate surge sag and dropout conditions with precise control of duration and phase e Create complex multi level sequences of output changes e Create output changes that have rapid or precise timing requirements The following AC source functions are subject to transient control e AC output voltage e Frequency e Phase e Waveform shape e AC voltage slew rate e Frequency slew rate The following transient modes can be generated Step generates a single triggered output change Pulse generates an output change which returns to its original state after some time period List generates a sequence of output changes each with an associated dwell time or paced by triggers Fixed turns off the transient functions which means that only the IMMediate values are used as the data source for a particular function At RST all functions are set to FIXed which turns off the transient functions 6 4 1 Transient System Model Figure 6 1 is a model of the transient system The figure shows the transient modes and the source of the data that generates each mode When a trigger is received in step or pulse modes the triggered functions are set from their IMMediate to their TRIGgered value Note In Step mode the triggered value b
75. 6 THD FUNCtion This command selects the shape of the output voltage waveform as follows SINusoid A sinewave is output SQUare A squarewave is output CSINusoid The output is a clipped sine waveform Both positive and negative peak amplitudes are clipped at a value determined by the SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid setting lt user_defined gt The output shape is described by one of the user defined waveform tables The maximum peak voltage that the AC source can output is 425 V peak This includes any combination of voltage and function shape values Therefore the maximum value that can be programmed depends on the peak to rms ratio of the selected waveform For a sinewave the maximum voltage that can be programmed is 300 V rms Before programming a different waveform shape the output voltage should be programmed to zero volts After the shape is changed the voltage maybe programmed to the desired value Note You cannot program a voltage that produces a higher volt second on the output than a 300V rms sinewave Command Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe IMMediate lt shape gt Parameters SINusoid SQUare CSINusoid waveform name RST Value SINusoid Examples FUNC SIN FUNC USERNAME Query Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe Returned Parameters CRD Related Commands FUNC MODE FUNC TRIGVOLT FUNCtion MODE This command determines how the waveform shape is controlled during a triggered output transient The choices are F
76. 6 5 MIL704 Abnormal State Commands MIL704 ABNormal VOLTage UNDer This command will set the low voltage level for the abnormal state operation Command Syntax MIL704 ABNormal VOLTage UNDer Parameters none Examples MIL704 ABN VOLT Query Syntax none MIL704 ABNormal VOLTage OVER This command will set the high voltage level for the abnormal state operation Command Syntax MIL704 ABNormal VOLTage OVER Parameters none Examples MIL704 ABN VOLT OVER Query Syntax none MIL704 ABNormal FREQuency UNDer This command will set the low frequency level for the abnormal state operation Command Syntax MIL704 ABNormal FREQuency UNDer Parameters none Examples MIL704 ABN FREQ Query Syntax none 200 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il MIL704 ABNormal FREQuency OVER This command will set the high frequency level for the abnormal state operation Command Syntax MIL704 ABNormal FREQuency OVER Parameters none Examples MIL704 ABN FREQ OVER Query Syntax none 8 6 6 MIL704 Emergeny State Commands MIL704 EMERgency VOLTage This command will set the voltage level for the emergency state operation Command Syntax MIL704 EMERgency VOLTage Parameters none Examples MIL704 EMER VOLT Query Syntax none MIL704 EMERgency FREQuency This command will set the frequency level for the emergency state operation Command Syntax MIL704 EMERgency FREQuency Parameters none Examples MIL704 EMER FREQ Query Syntax none
77. 704 206 5704 9 206 MS704 NORMal FREQuency MODulation 211 MS704 NORMalI FREQuency TRANsient COMBination 212 MS704 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient OVER EE ME 212 MS704 NORMalI FREQuency TRANsient UNDer 212 MS704 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient ALL 211 MS704 NORMalI SSLimits HIGH 209 MS704 NORMal SSLimits LOW 209 MS704 NORMalI SSLimits NOMinal 209 MS704 NORMal SSLimits UNBalance 209 MS704 NORMaI SSLimits ALL 209 MS704 NORMaI VOLTage DISTortion TOTal210 MS704 NORMaI VOLTage MODulation 210 MS704 NORMalI VOLTage PHASe DIFFerence P 210 MS704 NORMalI VOLTage TRANsient COMBina ie 211 MS704 NORMal VOLTage TRANsient OVER mE 210 MS704 NORMaI VOLTage TRANsient REPetitiv DE 211 MS704 NORMaI VOLTage TRANsient UNDer oa etin 211 214 MS704 NORMal VOLTage TRANsient ALL 210 MS704 POWer PHASe REVersal 217 MS704 POWer THRee 217 MS704 POWer COMBination ONE 217 2 217 217 8704 207 236 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II
78. 870455 4040 0 207 5704 5 207 9704 5 207 MS704 TEST CONDItiION anak ee Meet 208 MS704 TRANsfer YPOWer INTerrupt 218 OU DUE ornat 63 OUTP t DF ca ante 63 OUTPut DFI SOURCe 64 5 64 OUTPut PROTection CLEar 64 65 65 2 65 66 OUTPut TTLTrg SOURGCE 67 5 67 aati 87 5 87 87 68 PONSetup PEAK CURRent PROTection 68 PONSetup RELay HOLD 69 PONSetup SYNChronize PROTection 68 Port number TGP IB 33 89 848 89 PULSE HOLD iiig
79. AC address The MAC address Media Access Conrol is a unique hexadecimal address and is listed on a label on the rear panel of the power source To operate the power source on a network this MAC address needs to be assigned to a TCP IP address which will be used to address the device on the network 3 3 2 TCP IP and Gateway Address The first decision you need to make is how to connect the instrument You can connect the instrument directly to a network LAN port with a LAN cable or you can connect it directly to the PC When connecting the instrument directly to the PC LAN port you will need a special cable called a cross connect cable For more on private network connections see section 3 3 3 Once connected you must establish an IP address for the instrument An IP address consists of four groups of numbers separated by a decimal Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is typically the easiest way to configure the instrument for LAN communication DHCP automatically assigns a dynamic IP address to a device on a network To set the power source to DHCP mode see section 3 3 4 28 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 3 3 3 Private Networks without DHCP servers If you are setting up a private network that connects the power source to a Windows PC using a so called cross over RJ45 cable the PC will assign itself an IP address in the absence of a DHCP server The available IP address range assigned by the Internet Assigned Network Author
80. AC source are listed in Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Some capabilities support on the GPIB interface such as ATN GET and SRQ interrupts do not apply to the LAN interface The LAN interface operates internally at a fixed baudrate of 460800 baud but autodetection of 10Base T 100Base T and 1000Base T is supported To set up the LAN interface on a Windows XP PC refer to section 3 3 LAN Option 1 4 4 RS232C Capabilities of the AC source All AC source functions are programmable over the RS232C interface The RS232C capabilities of the AC source are listed in Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Some capabilities support on the GPIB interface such as ATN GET and SRQ interrupts do not apply to the RS232C interface Baudrates from 9600 to 115200 are supported To set up the RS232C interface refer to section 3 4 HS232C Serial Interface The RS232C interface may be used to install updated firmware for the Lx Ls controller if needed Firmware updates and a Flash Loader utility program and instructions are available from the AMETEK Programmable Power website for this purpose www programmablepower com Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 2 Introduction to SCPI SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments is a programming language for controlling instrument functions over the IEEE 488 SCPI is layered on top of the hardware portion of IEEE 488 2 The same SCPI commands and parameters control the same functions in different cla
81. AC source is first turned on it wakes up with the output state set OFF In this state the output voltage is set to 0 The following commands are given implicitly at power on RST CLS STATus PRESet SRE 0 ESE 0 RST is a convenient way to program all parameters to a known state Refer to the RST command in Section 5 to see how each programmable parameter is set by RST Refer to the PSC command in Section 5 for more information on the power on initialization of the and the SRE registers Enabling the Output To enable the output use the command OUTPut ON AC Voltage and Frequency The ac rms output voltage is controlled with the VOLTage command For example to set the ac output voltage to 125 volts rms use VOLTage 125 In the three phase mode all phases are programmed to 125 volts rms because the INSTrument COUPIle at RST is set to ALL 126 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il The AC source can be programmed to turn off its output if the ac output voltage exceeds a preset peak voltage limit This protection feature is implemented with the VOLTage PROTection command as explained in chapter 4 Maximum Voltage The maximum rms output voltage that can be programmed can be queried with VOLTage MAX The maximum voltage that the AC source can output is limited by the peak value of the waveform This is 425 V peak on all models Since the user programs output voltage in units of rms volts the maximum value
82. AN FREQ HIGH MIL704 FREQ MIL704 VERS 5704 MS704 NORM SSL ALL MS704 NORM SSL NOM MS704 NORM SSL LOW MS704 NORM SSL HIGH MS704 NORM SSL UNB MS704 NORM VOLT PHAS DIFF MS704 NORM VOLT MOD MS704 NORM VOLT DIST TOT MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN ALL MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN OVER MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN UND MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN COMB MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN REP MS704 NORM FREQ MOD MS704 NORM FREQ TRAN ALL MS704 NORM FREQ TRAN OVER MS704 NORM FREQ TRAN UND MS704 NORM FREQ TRAN COMB MS704 ABN LIM ALL MS704 ABN LIM NOM MS704 ABN LIM LOW MS704 ABN LIM HIGH MS704 ABN VOLT TRAN ALL MS704 ABN VOLT TRAN OVER MS704 ABN VOLT TRAN UND MS704 ABN VOLT TRAN COMB MS704 ABN FREQ TRAN ALL MS704 ABN FREQ TRAN OVER MS704 ABN FREQ TRAN UND MS704 ABN FREQ TRAN COMB MS704 EMER ALL 224 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II MS704 EMER NOM MS704 EMER LOW MS704 EMER HIGH MS704 POW FAIL COMB ALL MS704 POW FAIL COMB ONE MS704 POW FAIL COMB TWO MS704 POW FAIL THR MS704 POW FAIL PHAS REV MS704 TRAN POW INT MS704 FREQ MS704 GROU MS704 REV MS704 GROU MS704 VERS MS704 SKIP MS704 STAT MS704 STEP MS704 TEST COND OUTP DFI STAT OUTP DFI SOUR OUTP RI LEV OUTP RI MODE OUTP TTLT SOUR PONS CLOC PONS PEAK CURR PROT PONS RELAY HOLD PONS SYNC SOUR SOUR CURR PEAK IMM SOUR CURR PEAK MODE SOUR CURR PEAK TRIG SOUR FREQ SLEW IMM SOUR FREQ SLEW MODE SOUR FREQ SLEW TRIG SOUR FREQ TRIG SOUR FUNC
83. C source the entry Phase Selectable will appear in the command description Related Commands Where appropriate related commands or queries are included These are listed because they are either directly related by function or because reading about them will clarify or enhance your understanding of the original command or query This chapter is organized as follows e Subsystem commands arranged by subsystem IEEE 488 2 common commands 35 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 2 Subsystem Commands Subsystem commands are specific to AC source functions They can be a single command or a group of commands The groups are comprised of commands that extend one or more levels below the root The description of common commands follows the description of the subsystem commands The subsystem command groups are listed in alphabetical order and the commands within each subsystem are grouped alphabetically under the subsystem Commands followed by a question mark take only the query form When commands take both the command and query form this is noted in the syntax descriptions You will find the subsystem command groups discussed on the following pages 36 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 3 Calibration Subsystem The commands in this subsystem allow you to do the following e Enter the calibration password e Calibrate the current and voltage output levels and store new calibration constants in non
84. E 2 AMP1 15E 02 AMP1150E 1 A positive exponent value is represented by either an ASCII or an unsigned value 167 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 2 7 Program Headers A Program Header is a mnemonic of a series of three ASCII characters used to select a function or identify the data it precedes The header is an abbreviation of the program function it identifies The header may be followed by a header extension to separately program each output phase A or to different values If an extension is not added to the header all outputs will be programmed to the header s argument See Table 8 3 for the definition of the Program Headers and their related arguments Commands that are not supported on the Ls Series are noted Any header that is sent without an argument will cause the front display to show the closest available corresponding screen Note however that the Ls Series does not have identical screens to the L Series so this feature is only partially compatible with legacy L Series programs All commands are accepted however and no error messages will be generated Refer to Figure 8 1 for a summary of all possible command sequences The program header extension works on the trailing exception rule This characteristic can be used to shorten the setup string The following example demonstrates the trailing exception rule by programming the phase and B outputs to the square wave waveform and phase C to a sine wave WVF S
85. EE 488 TRIGger SEQuence1 SOURce IMMediate INITiate CONTinuous SEQuence1 ON When the trigger system enters the Output Change state upon receipt of a trigger see Figure 6 2 the triggered functions are set to their programmed trigger levels When the triggered actions are completed the trigger system returns to the Idle state 6 7 8 Specifying a Dwell Time for Each List Point Each voltage and current list point has an associated dwell time specified by LIST DWELI lt n gt lt n gt 138 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il where lt n gt specifies the dwell time in seconds The number of dwell points must equal the number of output points If a dwell list has only one value that value will be applied to all points in the output list After each new output level or point is programmed the output remains at that point in the list for the programmed dwell interval before the list advances to the next point Only an ABORt command can transfer the system out of the Dwelling state At the end of the dwell interval the transition to the next state depends on whether or not the list has completed its sequencing and the state of the LIST STEP command see Figure 6 2 If the list is completed the trigger system returns to the Idle state e If the list is not completed then the system reacts as follows LIST STEP programs the trigger system to return to the Initiated state to wait for the next trigger LIST STEP AUTO p
86. EQ HIGH LIM FREQ LOW LIM PHAS LIM VOLT HIGH LIM VOLT LOW MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR ACDC MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR AMPL MAX MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR AMPL RES MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR CRES MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR HARM AMPL MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR HARM PHAS MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR HARM THD MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR NEUT DC MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR NEUT AC MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR NEUT DC MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR NEUT ACDC MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR NEUT HARM AMPL MEAS or FETC SCAL CURR NEUR HARM PHAS MEAS or FETC SCAL POW AC APP MEAS or FETC SCAL POW AC REAC MEAS or FETC SCAL POW AC PFAC MEAS or FETC SCAL POW AC TOT MEAS or FETC SCAL VOLT ACDC MEAS or FETC SCAL VOLT HARM AMPL MEAS FETC SCAL VOLT HARM PHAS MEAS or FETC SCAL VOLT HARM THD MEAS or FETC ARR CURR HARM AMPL MEAS or FETC ARR CURR HARM PHAS MEAS or FETC ARR CURR NEUT DC MEAS or FETC ARR CURR NEUT HARM AMPL MEAS or FETC ARR CURR NEUT HARM PHAS MEAS ARR MOD MEAS or FETC ARR VOLT HARN AMPL MEAS or FETC ARR VOLT HARM PHAS MEAS THD MODE MIL704 MIL704 ABN VOLT UNDer MIL704 ABN VOLT OVER MIL704 ABN FREQ UNDer MIL704 ABN FREQ OVER MIL704 EMER VOLT MIL704 EMER FREQ MIL704 SST VOLT LEVel MIL704 SST VOLT MOD MIL704 SST VOLT UNB MIL704 SST PHAS UNB MIL704 SST WAV DIST MIL704 SST FREQ LEVel MIL704 SST FREQ MODulation MIL704 TRAN VOLT LOW MIL704 TRAN VOLT HIGH MIL704 TRAN FREQ LOW MIL704 TR
87. Enable Register This register determines which bits from the Status Byte Register see STB for its bit configuration are allowed to set the Master Status Summary MSS bit and the Request for Service RQS summary bit A 1 in any Service Request Enable Register bit position enables the corresponding Status Byte Register bit and all such enabled bits then are logically ORed to cause Bit 6 of the Status Byte Register to be set See chapter 7 under Programming the Status and Event Registers for more details concerning this process When the controller conducts a serial poll in response to SRQ the RQS bit is cleared but the MSS bit is not When SRE is cleared by programming it with 0 the AC source cannot generate an SRQ to the controller Command Syntax SRE lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 255 Default Value See PSC Example SRE 128 Query Syntax SRE Returned Parameters cNR 1 Register binary value Related Commands ESE ESR PSC 5 11 STB This query reads the Status Byte register which contains the status summary bits and the Output Queue bit Reading the Status Byte register does not clear it The input summary bits are cleared when the appropriate event registers are read see chapter 7 under Programming the Status and Event Registers for more information A serial poll also returns the value of the Status Byte register except that bit 6 returns Request for Service RQS instead of Master Status Summary MSS A
88. F TVF SXF REVision A B C D E F SKIP STATus STEP SINGIe CONTinuous TEST CONDition A Z AA ZZ OUTPut STATe bool DFI STATe bool SOURce QUES OPER ESB RQS OFF PON STATe RST RCLO 220 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II PROTection CLEar DELay lt n gt RI MODE LATCHing LIVE OFF TTLTrig MODE TRIG FSTR STATe bool SOURce BOT EOT LIST PONSetup CLOCK PEAK CURRent PROTection RELay HOLD SENSe COUPIe DC CURRent ACDC RANGe UPPer n SWEep OFFSet POINts lt n gt TINTerval n SOURce CURRent LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt PROTection DELay n STATe bool FREQuency CW IMMediate n MODE FIXed STEP PULSe LIST SENS EXT SLEW MMediate n INFinity MODE STEP PULSe LIST TRIGgered n INFinity TRIGgered n FUNCtion SHAPe 1 SINusoid SQUare CSINusoid user MODE FIXed STEP PULSe LIST TRIGgered SINusoid SQUare CSINusoid user CSINusoid n THD LIST COUNI n INFinity CURRent lt n gt lt n gt POINts DWELI lt n gt lt n gt POINts FREQuency LEVel lt n gt lt n gt POINts SLEW lt gt lt gt POINts MODE BOT PHASe lt n gt lt n gt POINts 5 lt shape gt lt shape gt POINts STEP ONCE AUTO TTLTrg l
89. GPIB instrument using your specific GPIB controller s function library 3 1 2 LxGui and IEEE 488 The provided Windows LxGui program supports the GPIB interface on both Lx Series and Ls Series models but only in combination with a National Instruments GPIB controller The default controller ID is zero but controller ID s from 0 thorugh 3 can be selected in the LxGui Interface screen if multiple GPIB controllers are present in the same PC Note that the LxGui program only supports one Lx Ls power source at a time 20 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 3 2 USB Interface Unlike RS232C there are no generic drivers available as a rule for us in programming environments such as LabView LabWindows CVI or Visual Basic However support for USB is included under VISA and may be used to interface to the power source using the USB interface For other environments a virtual serial port utility is provided on CD ROM CIC496 which ships with the Lx Ls Series power source This utility will provide a virtual COM port on a PC under Windows XP This allows legacy programs to use the USB port as though it is a regular serial port on the PC The baud rate for this mode of operation is fixed at 460 800 If you plan to use this feature the USB Serial Adaptor installation must be run to install the virtual com port driver This option is only supported under Windows XP Windows Vista 3 2 1 USB Driver Installation When connecting the AC source through
90. Language 183 8 4 RTCA DO 160D 160 isst nnne en tenens 188 8 5 RTCA DO160 Rev E Test ener enne rennen 195 8 6 MIL STD 704 Rev D 704 024 244 0 12 2 000 00000001100 8 8 196 8 7 MIL STD 704 Rev 704 20444 1 1 0 000000 nensi trns en sinis nnne en 202 8 8 Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Test Option ABD sssssssssssssseseee eene nennen nnne nennen 218 8 9 Airbus A350 ABD0100 1 8 1 Test Option 50 218 8 10 Airbus AMD24 Test Option 218 8 11 Boeing 787B3 0147 Test Option B787 sse enne nennen nnne 218 Appendix A SCPI Command 219 Appendix B SCPI Conformance Information esee eese esee ee ennnnn tenent 223 Appendix C Error Messages teet levine de uelis 226 Appendix D iL Series HP6834B 231 r2 cL E 234 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II Table of Figures Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 F
91. List mode lets you generate complex sequences of output changes with rapid precise timing which may be synchronized with internal or external signals Each function that can participate in output transients can also have an associated list of values that specify its output at each list point You can program up to 100 settings or points in the list the time interval dwell that each setting is maintained the number of times that the list will be executed and how the settings change in response to triggers All list point data is stored in nonvolatile memory This means that the programmed data for any list function will be retained when the AC source is turned off Lists are paced by a separate list of dwell times which define the duration of each output setting Therefore each of the up to 100 list points has an associated dwell time which specifies the time in seconds that the output remain at that setting before moving on to the next setting The following procedure shows how to generate a simple list of voltage and frequency changes 1 Set the mode of each function that will participate in the output sequence to LIST For example VOL Tage MODE LIST FREQuency MODE LIST 2 Program the list of output values for each function The list commands take a comma separated list of arguments The order in which the arguments are given determines the sequence in which the values will be output For example to cycle the voltage throug
92. Lx Ls Series Il AC Power Source Programming Manual AMETEK PROGRAMMABLE POWER Contact Information Telephone 800 733 5427 toll free in North America 858 450 0085 direct Fax 858 458 0267 Email Domestic Sales domorders sd ametek com International Sales intlorders sd ametek com Customer Service service ppd ametek com Web www programmablepower com March 201 1 Document No 7004 981 Rev S Refers to Lx Series AC Power Source Analyzers Series II Ls Series AC Power Sources Series 11 Models Single chassis 3000Lx 4500Lx 6000Lx Multiple chassis 90001 2 12000Lx 2 13500Lx 3 18000Lx 3 Single chassis 3000Ls 4500Ls 6000Ls Multiple chassis 9000Ls 2 12000Ls 2 13500Ls 3 180001 5 3 Manual revision S Copyright 2003 2010 AMETEK Programmable Power About AMETEK AMETEK Programmable Power Inc a Division of AMETEK Inc is a global leader in the design and manufacture of precision programmable power supplies for R amp D test and measurement process control power bus simulation and power conditioning applications across diverse industrial segments From bench top supplies to rack mounted industrial power subsystems AMETEK Programmable Power is the proud manufacturer of Elgar Sorensen California Instruments and Power Ten brand power supplies AMETEK Inc is a leading global manufacturer of electronic instruments and electromechanical devices with annualized sales of 2 5 billion The Company has
93. NT EXT Clock source CRL Numeric value 0 00 Current limit in Amps to 100 0 maximum available current DLY Numeric data from Delay in seconds 0 00 to 9999 DRP 1 through 5 Number of dropped periods FRQ Numeric data from Frequency in Hertz 45 00 or LLM to HLM value MOD PHS 1or3 Programs the output phase configuration PHZ A B C or numeric data Phase angle in degrees from 0 0 to 999 9 PRG 0 through 15 Register load REC 0 through 15 Recall register REG 0 through 15c Register load RNG 0 0 to limit value of Amplitude range and limit value in volts range SNC INT EXT Synchronize SRQ 0 1 2 Service request disable enable or at completion of program STP From parameter Step size minimum to maximum value TLK Any program header Setup AC source to talk argument when or other argument talk addressed TRG Execute Trigger setup parameters on 170 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II HEADER EXTENSION ARGUMENT DEFINITION GPIB GET message VAL From parameter Final ramp or step value in volts hertz minimum to amps degrees sine wave or square wave maximum value WVF A B C SNW SQW Waveform OPN Open output relays CLS Close output relays VLT A B C Used with TLK to request measurement of the output voltage ELT Used with TLK to request total accumulated run time CUR A B C Used with TLK to request measurement of the output load current P
94. NT SEQON INIT CONT NAME TRAN 1 Related Commands ABOR INIT CONT TRIG TRG 114 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II TRIGger When the trigger subsystem has been initiated the TRIGger command generates a trigger signal regardless of the selected trigger source Command Syntax TRIGger SEQuencet1 MMediate TRIGger TRANsient MMediate Parameters None Examples TRIG TRIG TRAN TRIG SEQ1 IMM Related Commands ABOR TRIG SOUR TRIG DEL TRIG SYNC TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT INIT CONT TRG WAI TRIGger DELay This command sets the time delay between the detection of a trigger signal and the start of any corresponding trigger action After the time delay has elapsed the trigger is implemented unless the trigger system is also waiting for a sync signal that has been specified by TRIGger SYNChronous PHASe Command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence1 DELay lt NRf gt TRIGger TRANsient DELay lt NRf gt Parameters 3 phase models 0 to 1 07533E6 MINimum MAXimum 1 phase models 0 to 4 30133E5 MINimum MAXimum Unit S seconds RST Value 0 Examples TRIG DEL 25 TRIG DEL MAX TRIG TRAN DEL 1 Query Syntax TRIGger SEQuence1 DELay TRIGger TRANsient DELay Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands ABOR TRIG TRIG SOUR TRIG SYNC TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT TRG WAI TRIGger SOURce This command selects the trigger source for the first sequence in generating a step pulse or list output as follows BUS IEEE 488 devi
95. None Examples CAL SAVE Related Commands CAL CURR CAL VOLT CALibrate SOURce PHASe Phase Selectable This command can be used to set the phase calibration offset coefficient Use the INST SEL or INST NSEL to select the desired phase This allows the phase for voltage 2 and 3 B and C to be adjusted with respect to phase A The query format returns the actual calibration coefficient Command Syntax CALibrate SOURce PHASe lt Nrf gt Parameters lt NRf gt Query Syntax CALibrate SOURce PHASe Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples CAL PHAS 1 3 Related Commands none CALibrate SOURce VOLTage HRANge Phase Selectable This command can be used to query the output voltage calibration coefficient Only the query format is available Use the INST SEL or INST NSEL to select the desired phase The parameter can be any integer value between 0 and 4000 Factory default is 450 Command Syntax CALibrate SOURce VOLTage HRANge lt Nrf gt Parameters 0 to 4000 Query Syntax CALibrate SOURce VOLTage HRANge Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples CAL VOLT HRAN 450 Related Commands none 38 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 4 Diagnostic Subsystem These subsystem commands perform diagnostic functions which include reading and writing to the EEPROM resetting the AC source and reading temperature Subsystem Syntax DIAGnostic RESet Force power on reset TEMPerature AMBient Returns ambient temper
96. OLT LOW LIMit VOLTage LOW Query form returns the maximum available output voltage for the low voltage range This value determines the maximum AC RMS voltage available using a sinusoidal waveform Note that this is not the same as the available maximum voltage which is a function crest factor of the voltage waveform To query the maximum available voltage use the VOLT MAX command Query Syntax LIMit VOLTage LOW Returned Parameters lt gt Examples LIM VOLT LOW Related Commands LIM VOLT HIGH 44 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 4 8 Array Measurement Subsystem This subsystem lets you retrieve arrays containing measurements data Only current and voltage measurements are stored in an array Two measurement commands are available MEASure and FETCh MEASure triggers the acquisition of new data before returning the readings from the array FETCh returns previously acquired data from the array Individual outputs of a three phase source are specified by the setting of INSTrument NSELect Subsystem Syntax MEASure FETCh ARRay CURRent DC Returns the digitized instantaneous current HARMonic AMPLitude Returns amplitudes of the first 50 harmonics PHASe Returns phase angles of the first 50 harmonics MODE Selects waveform data transfer format Returns the neutral digitized instantaneous current 3 phase only HARMonic AMPLitude Returns neutral current harmonic a
97. OLTage Phase Selectable This command programs the ac rms output voltage level of the AC source The maximum peak voltage that the AC source can output is 425 V peak This includes any combination of voltage and function shape values Therefore the maximum value that can be programmed depends on the peak to rms ratio of the selected waveform For a sinewave the maximum voltage that can be programmed is 300 V rms Note You cannot program a voltage that produces a higher volt second on the output than a 300V rms sinewave Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage LE Vel IMMediate AMPLitude lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 300 for sinewaves Unit V rms voltage RST Value 1 volt Examples VOLT 250 VOLT LEV 25 Query Syntax SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Returned Parameters lt gt Related Commands VOLT MODE VOLT TRIG FUNC SHAP 92 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II VOLTage TRIGgered Phase Selectable This command selects the ac rms amplitude that the output waveform will be set to during a triggered step or pulse transient The maximum peak voltage that the AC source can output is 425 V peak This includes any combination of voltage and function shape values Therefore the maximum value that can be programmed depends on the peak to rms ratio of the selected waveform For a sinewave the maximum voltage that can be programmed is 300 V rms Note You cannot program a voltage that produces a higher volt
98. POINts SLEW lt n gt lt n gt POINts MODE BOT EOT PHASe lt n gt lt n gt POINtS SHAPe lt shape gt lt shape gt POINtS STEP ONCE AUTO TTL Trg lt bool gt lt bool gt POINtS VOLTage LEVel lt n gt lt n gt POINts SLEW lt n gt lt n gt POINts Sets the list repeat count Sets the list of dwell times Returns the number of dwell list points Sets the frequency list Returns the number of frequency points Sets the frequency slew list Returns the number of frequency slew points Sets the list operation mode Sets the phase list Returns the number of phase list points Sets the waveform shape list Returns the number of shape list points Defines whether list is dwell or trigger paced Defines the output marker list Returns the number of output marker list points Sets the voltage list Returns the number of voltage level points Sets the voltage slew list Returns the number of voltage slew points 79 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il LIST COUNt This command sets the number of times that the list is executed before it is completed The command accepts parameters in the range 1 through 2E8 Use MAX to set the list to maximum Command Syntax SOURce LIST COUNt lt NRf gt Parameters 1 to 2E8 MINimum MAXimum RST Value 1 Examples LIST COUN 3 LIST COUN INF Query Syntax SOURce LIST COUNt Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands LIST CURRLIS
99. Parameters 45 to 5000 Unit HZ Hertz RST Value 60 Hz Examples FREQ 50 Query Syntax SOURce FREQuency Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands FREQ MODE FREQ SLEW FREQuency MODE This command determines how the output frequency is controlled Available modes are FIXed The output frequency is unaffected by a triggered output transient The clock source is the internal controller timebase STEP The output frequency is programmed to the value set by FREQuency TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs PULSe The output frequency is changed to the value set by FREQuency TRIGgered for a duration determined by the pulse commands LIST The output frequency is controlled by the frequency list when a triggered transient occurs SENSe External sync or line sync clock mode The frequency is synchronized to the external sync or line sync frequency See Lx Ls user manuals for sync operation details EXTernal External clock mode This mode is used on an Lx Ls unit with the LKS option to sync to a master Lx Ls unit Command Syntax SOURce FREQuency MODE mode Parameters FIXed STEP PULSe LIST SENSe EXTernal RST Value FIXed Examples FREQ MODE FIX Query Syntax SOURce FREQuency MODE Returned Parameters CRD Related Commands FREQ FREQ TRIG 73 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il FREQuency SLEW This command sets the rate at which frequency changes for all programmed changes in output fr
100. QW WVF C SNW Refer to Figure 8 1 for a summary of all possible APE command sequences 8 2 8 APE Command Tree Summary TO PROGRAM OUTPUT PARAMETERS AMP gt gt WVF SNW SNC REC n REG n FRO IAI CLS A SQW CLK EXT CRL IBI RNG PHZ DRP gt gt gt gt gt gt RAMP OR STEP ONE OUTPUT PARAMETER AMP n gt STP n DLY VAL n gt FRO A CRL B DLY n gt VAL n gt NOTE NOT SUPPORTED ON Ls Series PHZ p NOTE NOT SUPPORTED ON Ls Series TO RAMP OR STEP TWO OUTPUT PARAMETERS AMP n AMP n STP n DLY n VAL n STP n gt FRQ A FRQ IA CRL B CRL B gt DLY n VAL n gt VAL n gt NOTE NOT SUPPORTED Ls Series PHZ PHZ NOT SUPPORTED Ls Series TO REQUEST TALKING OF CALIBRATION COEFFICIENTS TLK CAL AMP A VLT B PWR IC CUR TO SPECIFY THE SERVICE REQUEST INTERRUPT S8RQ n 168 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il TO CALIBRATE OUTPUT 5OAL 7 7 4 n 2DLY n 2STP n VAL n NOTE NOT SUPPORTED ON Ls Series AMP
101. R VOLT MODE SOUR VOLT PROT AMPL SOUR VOLT RANG SOUR VOLT SLEW IMM SOUR VOLT PROT STAT SOUR VOLT ALC or SENS SOUR STAT OPER EVEN STAT OPER COND STAT OPER ENAB STAT OPER NTR STAT OPER PTR STAT PRES STAT QUES STAT QUES EVEN STAT QUES COND STAT QUES ENAB STAT QUES NTR STAT QUES PTR STAT QUES INST ISUM EVEN STAT QUES INST ISUM COND STAT QUES INST ISUM ENAB STAT QUES INST ISUM NTR STAT QUES INST ISUM PTR SYST COMM SYST ERR SYST LANG SYST VERS TRAC or DATA CAT TRAC or DATA DATA TRAC or DATA DEF TRAC or DATA DEL NAME TRIG SEQ lt n gt DEL TRIG SEQ lt n gt IMM TRIG SEQ lt n gt SOUR TRIG SOUR CLS ESE ESE ESR IND OPC OPC OPT PSC PSC RCL RST SAV SRE STB TRG TST WAI Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series Il Non SCPI commands CAL MEAS CURR CAL MEAS CURR SPH CAL MEAS VOLT CAL PASS CAL PHAS CAL SAVE CAL VOLT DIAG RES DIAG TEMP AMB DISPL STAT DISPL MODE DISPL TEXT DO160 ABN FREQ TRAN DO160 ABN VOLT MAX DO160 ABN VOLT MIN DO160 ABN VOLT OVER DO160 ABN VOLT UNB DO160 ABN VOLT UND DO160 CAT DO160 EMER VOLT_FREQ MAX DO160 EMER VOLT_FREQ MIN DO160 EMER VOLT UNB DO160 GRO DO160 NORM FREQ MOD DO160 NORM FREQ TRAN DO160 NORM FREQ VAR DO160 NORM VOLT_FREQ MAX DO160 NORM VOLT_FREQ MIN DO160 NORM VOLT INT DO160 NORM VOLT MOD DO160 NORM VOLT SURG DO160 NORM VOLT UNB DO160 NORM WAV DIST DO160 STAN LIM CURR LIM FR
102. R RECEIVED LIST STEP ONCE DELAYING STATE DELAY COMPLETED WAIT FOR SYNC STATE SYNC COMPLETED OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT STEP PULSE LIST CHANGES CHANGES CHANGES YES puLsEN NO COUNT DONE Figure 6 2 Model of output trigger system 6 7 3 Initiating the Output Trigger System When the AC source is turned on the trigger subsystem is in the idle state In this state the trigger subsystem ignores all triggers Sending the following commands at any time returns the trigger system to the Idle state ABORt RST 136 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il INITiate commands move the trigger system from the Idle state to the Initiated state This enables the AC source to receive triggers To initiate for a single triggered action use INI Tiate MMediate SEQuence1 INITiate IMMediate NAME TRANsient After a trigger is received and the action completes the trigger system will return to the Idle state Thus it will be necessary to initiate the system each time a triggered action is desired To keep a trigger system initiated for multiple actions without having to send an initiate command for each trigger use INITiate CONTinuous SEQuencet1 ON INITiate CONTinuous NAME TRANsient ON The SEQuence2 or SYNChronize trigger sequence does not have an INITiate command It is always initiated 6 7 4
103. REQ SLEW 10 1E2 INF Query Syntax SOURce LIST FREQ SLEW Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands LIST FREQ SLEW POIN LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST STEP LIST FREQ LIST FREQuency SLEW POINts This query returns the number of points specified in LIST FREQuency SLEW Note that it returns only the total number of points not the point values Query Syntax SOURce LIST FREQ SLEW POINts Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Example LIST FREQ SLEW POIN Related Commands LIST FREQ SLEW LIST MODE This command sets the mode of operation for the transient list system The default mode after RST is always BOT In BOT mode the output of the power source will return to the steady state program values when the transient list execution completes This mode is compatible with the HP843B and Cl iL series power sources In EOT mode the output of the power source will remain at the final value reached at the end of the transient list execution This mode is compatible with other Cl power source models This command requires firmware revision 1 31 or higher This mode is not stored in any setup register so the unit will always revert to BOT mode at power up or after a RST command Note that sending the ABORT command will always cause the output to revert to the last steady state program values 81 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Note Command Syntax SOURce LIST MODE Parameters BOT EOT Examples LIST MODE Query
104. Returned Parameters 51 values Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe These queries return an array of harmonic phases of output current of the neutral output terminal in degrees referenced to the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component The first value returned is the dc component always returned as 0 degrees phase the second value is the fundamental frequency and so on up to the 50th harmonic Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as 0 Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe Parameters None Example MEAS ARR CURR NEUT HARM PHAS FETC ARR CURR NEUT HARM PHAS Returned Parameters 51 NR3 values Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure ARRay MODe This command selects the waveform array data format to be used The default mode is binary BIN which uses an IEEE floating point data format in which each data sample is transferred as a 4 byte floating point binary data word Alternatively an ASCII format may be selected ASCii in which each data sample is sent as 8 ASCII Hex values representing the 4 byte IEEE floating point data Note that th
105. SCPI equivalent power initialization commands Note When upgrading the firmware on an Ls Series unit that has a firmware revision of 0 90 or less the above parameters must be reset in APE mode 165 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 2 3 GPIB Address The GPIB address also referred to as the unit address of the Lx Ls Series power source is the same for either language mode The Unit Address can range from 0 through 31 The Unit Address is set at the factory to 1 but may be changed by selecting the CONFIGURATION screen and setting a new value The value set is retained in non volatile memory In APE mode the GPIB address is returned by the TLK CFGA query command The CFGA command will be accepted but changes to the GPIB listen address will not take effect until input power on the Ls unit is cycled This is different than the L Series where the new listen address takes effect immediately 8 2 4 APE over RS232 Although not available on the L Series power source the Ls AC power source also has a RS232C serial interface It is possible to use the APE mode over RS232C but this mode of operation is not formally supported by California Instruments Certain capabilities such as GPIB trigger and SRQ may not function when using the RS232C interface In general it is recommended to use the normal SCPI mode when programming the Ls Series over the RS232C interface 166 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 2 5 Message Format The
106. Selecting the Output Trigger Source The trigger system is waiting for a trigger signal in the Initiated state Before you generate a trigger you must select a trigger source To select the external Trigger In1 SMA as the source use TRIGger SEQuence1 SOURce EXTernal or TRIGger TRANsient SOURce EXTernal To select IEEE 488 bus triggers group execute trigger device trigger or TRG commana use TRIGger SEQuence1 SOURce BUS or TRIGger TRANsient SOURce BUS To select a trigger source that is always true use TRIGger SEQuence1 SOURce IMMediate or TRIGger TRANsient SOURce IMMediate The immediate source can be combined with INITiate CONTinuous SEQuence1 ON to generate repetitive output transients A transition from the Initiated state to the Delay state is made when the trigger signal is received 6 7 5 Specifying a Trigger Delay A time delay can be programmed between the receipt of the trigger signal and the start of the output transient At RST the trigger delay is set to 0 which means that there is no delay program a delay use TRIGger SEQuence1 DELay 01 or TRIGger TRANsient DELay 01 which sets a delay time of 10 milliseconds A trigger delay can only be programmed for SEQuencet1 or TRANsient triggers When the programmed trigger delay has elapsed the trigger System transitions from the Delay state to the Wait for sync state 137 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 6 7 6 Synchronizing Output Changes to a Refere
107. T FREQ LIST TTLTLIST VOLT LIST DWELI This command sets the sequence of list dwell times Each value represents the time in seconds that the output will remain at the particular list step point before completing the step At the end of the dwell time the output of the AC source depends upon the following conditions e f LIST STEP AUTO has been programmed the output automatically changes to the next point in the list If LIST STEP ONCE has been programmed the output remains at the present level until a trigger sequences the next point in the list The order in which the points are entered determines the sequence in which they are output when a list is triggered Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied Command Syntax SOURce LIST DWELI lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Parameters 3 phase mode 0 to 1 07533E6 MINimum MAXimum 1 phase mode 0 to 4 30133E5 MINimum MAXimum Unit S seconds Examples LIST DWEL 5 5 1 5 Query Syntax SOURce LIST DWEL Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands LIST FREQ LIST TTLT LIST VOLT LIST DWELI POINts This query returns the number of points specified in LIST DWELI Note that it returns only the total number of points not the point values Query Syntax SOURce LIST DWELI POINts Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Example LIST DWEL POIN Related Commands LIST DWEL LIST FREQuency This command sets the sequence of frequency list poi
108. T MEAS ARR SENSe SWEep TINTerval This command defines the time period between samples The sample period can be programmed from 10 42 to 104 2 microseconds in 10 microsecond increments in single phase mode and from 31 25 to 312 5 microseconds in three phase mode All the MEASure commands use the ACQuire trigger sequence implicitly Command Syntax SENSe SWEep TINTerval lt NRf gt Parameters 10 42 through 104 2 microseconds RST Value 10 42 us or 31 25 us Examples SENS SWE TINT 100 Query Syntax SENSe SWEep TINTerval Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands SENS SWE OFFS POIN MEAS ARR 70 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 4 16 Source Subsystem Current This subsystem programs the output current of the AC source Subsystem Syntax SOURce CURRent LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt Sets the rms current limit PROTection DELay Current limit fault delay STATe bool Enable Disable rms current limit protection CURRent Phase Selectable This command sets the rms current limit of the specified output phase If the output current exceeds this limit the output voltage amplitude is reduced until the rms current is within the limit The CL bit of the questionable status register indicates that the current limit control loop is active If the current protection state is programmed on the output latches into a disabled state when current limiting occurs Note that the CURRent command is coupled
109. T TRIGGER TRIGGER SYSTEM Figure 7 2 SMA Connector Trigger Model 159 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 7 8 Remote Inhibit and Discrete Fault Indicator The remote inhibit and discrete fault indicators are implemented through the respective INH and FLT connections on the rear panel Refer to the User s Manual for the electrical parameters 7 8 1 Remote Inhibit RI Remote inhibit is an external chassis referenced logic signal routed through the rear panel INH connection which allows an external device to signal a fault To select an operating modes for the remote inhibit signal use OUTPut RI MODE LATChing LIVE OFF LATChing causes a low true signal on the INH input to disable the output The only way to clear the latch is by sending an OUTPut PROTection CLEAR command while the INH input is false LIVE allows the RI input to disable the output in a non latching manner When INH is low true the output is disabled When INH is high it has no effect on the output OFF disables the INH input 7 8 2 Discrete Fault Indicator DFI The discrete fault indicator is a chassis referenced open collector logic signal connected to the rear panel FLT connection that can be used to signal external devices when a fault condition is detected To select the internal fault source that drives this signal use OUTPut DFI SOURce QUEStionable OPERation ESB RQS OFF QUEStionable selects the Questionable
110. Tage TRANsient OVER Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN VOLT TRAN OVER Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient UNDer This command will run the abnormal under voltage transients test Command Syntax MS704 NORMalI VOLTage TRANsient UNDer Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN UND Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient COMBination This command will run the abnormal combination voltage transients test Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient COMBination Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN VOLT TRAN COMB Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient ALL This command will run all the abnormal frequency transients tests Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient ALL Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN FREQ TRAN Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient OVER This command will run the abnormal over frequency transients test Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient OVER Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN FREQ TRAN OVER Query Syntax none 213 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient UNDer This command will run the abnormal under frequency transients test Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient UNDer Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN FREQ TRAN UND Query Syntax none MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient COMBination This command will run the abnormal combination frequency
111. Then mant f mant f EXPO MAX mant f expo val mant f expo val Else mant f mant f EXPO MAX End If i zi End If End If Append number sign and return value If sign Then mant f mant f StringToIEEEFloat mant f Exit Function FloatConvError Conversion errors are truncated to zero StringToIEEEFloat 0 Exit Function End Function 6 9 3 Varying the Voltage and Current Sampling Rate At RST the output voltage and current sampling rate is 96 kHz period 10 4 usec This means that it takes about 43 milliseconds to fill up 4096 data points in the voltage and current data buffers with the information required to make a measurement calculation You can vary this data sampling rate with SENSe SWEep TINTerval sample period gt The sample period can be programmed from a minimum period of 10 microseconds the default to 100 microseconds in 10 microsecond steps 146 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 6 9 4 Pre event and Post event Triggering The range for this offset is 4096 to 2E9 points As shown in the following figure when the offset is negative the values at the beginning of the data record represent samples taken prior to the trigger When the value is 0 all of the values are taken after the trigger Values greater than zero can be used to program a delay time from the receipt of the trigger until the data points that are entered into the buffer are valid Delay time Offset x Sample perio
112. This enables the AC source to receive triggers To initiate for a measurement trigger use INI Tiate MMediate SEQuence3 or INITiate IMMediate NAME AC Quire After a trigger is received and the data acquisition completes the trigger system will return to the Idle state Thus it will be necessary to initiate the system each time a triggered acquisition is desired 142 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Note You cannot initiate measurement triggers continuously Otherwise the measurement data in the data buffer would continuously be overwritten by each triggered measurement 6 8 10 Selecting the Measurement Trigger Source The trigger system is waiting for a trigger signal in the Initiated state Before you generate a trigger you must select a trigger source To select the external Trigger In1 SMA as the source use TRIGger SEQuence3 SOURce EXTernal or TRIGger ACQuire SOURce EXTernal To select IEEE 488 bus triggers group execute trigger device trigger or TRG command use TRIGger SEQuence3 SOURce BUS TRIGger ACQuire SOURce BUS To select the signal driving the Trigger Out1 SMA connector use TRIGger SEQuence3 SOURce TTLTrg or TRIGger ACQuire SOURce TTLTrg 6 8 11 Generating Measurement Triggers Providing that you have specified the appropriate trigger source you can generate triggers as follows sending one of the following over the IEEE 488 e TRIGger SEQuence3 IMMediate TRlGger ACQuire IMMedi
113. ULSe PERiod 1 specifies a pulse period of 1 second e PULSe DCYCIe 50 specifies a duty cycle of 5096 e PULSe WIDTh 5 specifies a pulse width of 5 seconds not necessary in this case since a duty cycle has already been specified 5 Initiate the transient trigger system to enable it to receive a trigger To enable the trigger System for one transient event use INITiate IMMediate SEQuence1 6 Toenable the transient system indefinitely use INITiate CONTinuous SEQuence1 ON Trigger the transient This is described in detail under Triggering Output Changes Example The following example programs a voltage dropout for 2 cycles of a 120 volt 60 Hz output The dropout begins at the positive peak of the output voltage waveform 90 degrees phase and is triggered by IEEE 488 bus trigger RST Begin at power on state VOLT 120 Set initial output voltage immediate level FREQ 60 Set initial output frequency OUTP ON Enable the output VOLT MODE PULS Enable output to generate pulses when triggered VOLT TRIG 0 Set the voltage dropout triggered level PULS WIDT 03333 Set pulse width for 2 periods TRIG SOUR BUS Respond to IEEE 488 bus triggers TRIG SYNC SOUR PHAS Synchronize triggers to internal phase reference TRIG SYNC PHAS 90 Sets internal phase reference point to 90 degrees INIT SEQ1 Set to Wait for trigger state device trigger Send the IEEE 488 bus trigger 133 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 6 6 List Transients
114. VOLTage POINts Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Example LIST VOLT POIN Related Commands LIST VOLT LIST VOLTage SLEW This command specifies the output offset slew points in a list The slew points are given in the command parameters which are separated by commas The order in which the points are entered determines the sequence in which the list will be output when a list transient is triggered Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied ABORt Command Syntax SOURce LIST VOLTage SLEW lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Parameters 1E 4 to 9 9E37 INFinity MINimum MAXimum Unit V S volts per second Example LIST VOLT SLEW 10 1E2 INF Query Syntax SOURce LIST VOL Tage SLEW Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands LIST VOLT SLEW POIN LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST STEP LIST VOLTage SLEW POINts This query returns the number of points specified in LIST VOLTage SLEW Note that it returns only the total number of points not the point values 84 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax SOURce LIST VOLTage SLEW POINts Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Example LIST VOLT SLEW POIN LIST VOLT SLEW POIN MAX Related Commands LIST VOLT SLEW 85 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 20 Source Subsystem Phase This subsystem programs the output phases of the AC source When phase commands are used to program single phase units the only discernible effect in
115. VOLTage PROTection MAX 2 5 5 Message Unit Separator When two or more message units are combined into a compound message separate the units with a semicolon STATus OPERation QUEStionable 2 5 6 Root Specifier When it precedes the first header of a message unit the colon becomes the root specifier It tells the command parser that this is the root or the top node of the command tree Note the difference between root specifiers and header separators in the following examples OUTPut PROTection DELay 1 All colons are header separators OUTPut PROTection DELay 1 Only the first colon is a root specifier OUTPut PROTection DELay 1 VOLTage 12 5 Only the third colon is a root specifier Note You do not have to precede root level commands with a colon there is an implied colon in front of every root level command 2 5 7 Message Terminator A terminator informs SCPI that it has reached the end of a message Three permitted messages terminators are e newline lt NL gt which is ASCII decimal 10 or hex OA e end or identify END both of the above lt NL gt lt END gt In the examples of this manual there is an assumed message terminator at the end of each message If the terminator needs to be shown it is indicated as NL regardless of the actual terminator character Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 2 6 SCPI Data Formats All data programmed to or returned from the AC source is ASCII The data may be
116. WR A B C Used with TLK to request measurement of the real output power APW A B C Used with TLK to request measurement of the apparent output power PWF A B C Used with TLK to request measurement of the output power factor PZM A B C Used with TLK to request measurement of the output phase angle FQM Used with TLK to request measurement of the output frequency Table 8 3 APE language syntax program headers 171 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 2 10 APE Queries TLK Headers The table below shows the APE TLK headers the phase selection extension and available arguments If the phase extension s do not follow the header the command will be applied to all available phases The TLK header precedes all query commands in APE This is the equivalent of the query termination in SCPI Most settings can be queried by using the TLK header in conjunction with the relevant programming command header e g TLK AMP to query the voltage setting The TLK header is also used to query measurements Default voltage range code Low Voltage Range High Voltage Range 0 to 270 0 Programmed voltage Amplitude value in volts 0 to 6000 or Output VA 3000Ls to 6000Ls 0 00 to 20 00 Output KVA All other models 0 to 30 IEEE 488 Listen Address 28 Configuration Code 120 Phase C initial Value MAX CURRENT Defines the maximum current per phase model specific 0 2 Defines the power measurement re
117. YSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity This command will set the SERial communication parity Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity lt parity gt Parameters NONE EVEN ODD Example SYST COMM SER PAR NONE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS This command will set the SERial communication number of data bits Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS lt NRF gt Parameters 7 8 SYST COMM SER BITS 8 Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs This command will set the SERial communication number of stop bits Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial SBITs lt NRF gt Parameters 12 Example SYST COMM SER SBITs 1 Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt SYSTem CONFiguration This query format of this command returns the installed options and configuration settings of the power source It is not possible to change the configuration as only the query form is supported Command Syntax SYSTem CONFigure Query Syntax SYSTem CONFigure Returned Parameters lt AARD gt Related Commands OPT SYSTem CONFiguration NOUTputs This command selects the number of outputs phases for the AC source This requires that the AC source is capable of switching between single and three phase mode Execution of this command disables all outputs clears lists and RCL states to the initialization default values reconfigures current readback and programming calibration consta
118. acquisition trigger system is discussed under Triggering Measurements Note For each MEASure form of the query there is a corresponding query that begins with the header FETCh FETCh queries perform the same calculation as their MEASure counterparts but do not cause new data to be acquired Data acquired by an explicit trigger or a previously programmed MEASure command are used 6 8 1 Voltage and Current Measurements To read the sum of ac and dc components of the rms voltage or current use MEASure VOLTage ACDC or MEASure CURRent ACDC To measure the dc voltage or current components use MEASure VOLTage DC or 139 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il MEASure CURRent DC To measure the maximum current amplitude and the current crest factor use MEASure CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum MEASure CURRent CREStfactor 6 8 2 Power Measurements The MEASure and FETCh queries can return real apparent and reactive power measurements as well as dc power and power factor using the following commands MEASure POWer AC APParent measures the ac component of apparent power in VA MEASure POWer AC REACtive measures the reactive power MEASure POWer AC REAL measures the in phase component of power in watts MEASure POWer AC PFACtor returns the output power factor MEASure POWer AC TOTal measures the total real power being sourced MEASure POWer DC measures the dc component of power 6 8 3 Harmonic Measurements The MEASure and FETCh q
119. address is not static but assigned by a DHCP server the NCON parameter Network Connection Setting must be added to the query The default value is 8 Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HBITs lt NRF gt Parameters 8 to 32 Example SYST COMM LAN HBIT 8 Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN HBIT SYST COMM LAN HBIT NCON Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PASSword This command will set the user password The password is used to access to LAN configuration screen from the Web page The default password is admin The description is limited to 8 characters Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PASSword lt SRD gt Parameters lt SRD gt Example SYST COMM LAN PASS admin Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN PASS Returned Parameters lt SRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PORT This command will set the socket port number The query format returns the port number set The default value is 5025 Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PORT lt NRF gt Parameters 0 65535 Example SYST COMM LAN PORT 5025 Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN PORT Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD This command will set the SERial communication baud rate 107 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II Note Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD lt NRF gt Parameters 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 230400 460800 Example SYST COMM SER BAUD 38400 Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt S
120. aintain 100 bus compatability The known differences are outline here for reference AMETEK Programmable Power strives to provide as comprehensive a level of information on this issue as possible However other incompatibilities may exist that have not been uncovered For technical support or to report compatibility issues contact service programmablepower com Device Identification IDN response The IDN response will be similar in structure but different in content The following IDN responses apply to each model series Model IDN Response Comment 4500iL CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS 45001L 0 A 00 04 6834B HP 6834B 0 A 00 04 4500Lx California Instruments 4500Lx 54321 Rev1 13 Note double quotes If existing test programs or drivers have to be used without modification it is possible to change the Lx Series IDN model number response by using the following command Command Comment SYST OEM HP Changes Manufacturer SYST MODEL 4500iL Changes model number This will change the model number to the string specified between quotation marks Note that this will make it more difficult to tell the 4500Lx from an actual 4500iL over the bus so this approach should be avoided if possible Calibration Subsystem The Lx controller hardware is functionally equivalent to the iL controller but uses a more advanced calibration mechanism This makes it impossible to support to iL s SCPI calibration subsystem Th
121. al P N 7004 980 is provided on the same CDROM as this user manual AMETEK Programmable Power may make updated versions of this manual available from time to time in electronic format through it s website To obtain an updated manual revision if available check the California Instruments Manual download page at www programmablepower com You need to register as a customer to obtain free access to manual and software downloads 1 4 Introduction to Programming This section provides some general information regarding programming instrumentation and available interface types 1 4 1 IEEE 488 Capabilities of the AC source All AC source functions except for setting the IEEE 488 address are programmable over the IEEE 488 The IEEE 488 2 capabilities of the AC source are listed in Chapter 2 of the User s Manual The Lx Series offers standard IEEE 488 interface The Ls Series requires the GPIB option The AC source operates from an IEEE 488 address that is set from the front panel To set the IEEE 488 address press the MENU key on the front panel repeatedly until the CONFIGURATION entry is shown on the LCD display Move the indicator on the right hand side of the display to point to CONFIGURATION and press the ENTER key This will display the IEEE ADRRESS currently set To change the address use the Voltage knob to increment or decrement the value Press the ENTER key to confirm your selection To set up the GPIB IEEE 488 interface on a Window
122. and the Questionable Condition status register OV bit is set see Section 7 under Programming the Status and Event Registers An overvoltage condition can be cleared with the OUTPut PROTection CLEar command after the condition that caused the OVP trip is removed The OVP always trips with zero delay and is unaffected by the OUTPut PROTection DELay command Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage PROTection LEVel lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 500 Unit V peak voltage 5 Value MAX Examples VOLT PROT 400 VOLT PROT LEV MAX Query Syntax SOURce VOLTage PROTection LEVel Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands OUTP PROT CLE VOLTage RANGe Phase Selectable This command sets the voltage range of the AC source Two voltage ranges are available a 150 volt range and a 300 volt range Sending a parameter greater than 150 selects the 300 volt range otherwise the 150 volt range is selected When the range is set to 150 the maximum rms voltage that can be programmed for a sine wave is 150 volts For other waveshapes the maximum programmable voltage may be different depending on the waveform crest factor The VOLTage RANGe command is coupled with the CURRent command This means that the maximum current limit that can be programmed at a given time depends on the voltage range setting in which the unit is presently operating Refer to chapter 4 under Coupled Commands for more information A user settable delay may be inserted betwe
123. ansient list data to non volatile memory Flash memory access times are longer TRAC DATA 500 msec Save waveform data to non volatile memory Flash memory access times are longer OUTP Default 100 msec This output relay and range change relay settling time delays can be set to value up to 1000 msec using the PONS REL HOLD command See section 4 14 Power On Subsystem Adjust delay to value set as needed Note The programmable delay for the output relay is active only when opening the relay When closing the output relay there is a 150 msec fixed delay VOLT RANG Default 100 msec This output relay and range change relay settling time delays can be set to value up to 1000 msec using the PONS REL HOLD command See section 4 14 Power On Subsystem SYST CONF NOUT 100 msec Phase mode change Available on Lx or Ls with MODE option Switching between single or three phase output configuration requires reinitialization of controller RST 1 sec Softboot reset of controller requires reinitialization TST 10 sec Selftest execution time CAL XXXX 300 msec Save output coeficient calibration data to non volatile memory Flash memory access times are longer CAL SAVE 300 msec Save calibration data to non volatile memory Flash memory access times are longer Table 6 1 Command Processing Times 149 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 7 Programming the Status and
124. at 0 degrees phase reference An error will occur if exactly 1024 data points are not sent with the command See section 6 10 for additional information on using the TRAC DEF and TRAC DATA commands Data points can be in any arbitrary units The AC source scales the data to an internal format that removes the dc component and ensures that the correct ac rms voltage is output when the waveform is selected When queried trace data is returned as normalized values in the range of 1 You can query the predefined SINusoid SQUare or CSINusoid waveform shapes but you cannot use the predefined names as names for your waveform Waveform data is stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained when input power is removed Up to 50 user defined waveforms may be created and stored The RST and RCL commands have no effect on user defined waveforms A waveform can be selected for output using the FUNCtion SHAPe FUNCtion SHAPe TRIGgered or LIST SHAPe commands Command Syntax TRACe DATA lt waveform_name gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt DATA DATA lt waveform_name gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Parameters lt waveform_name gt lt amplitude gt Example TRAC flattop 0 1 0 3 0 7 0 7 0 3 0 1 Query Syntax TRACe DATA lt waveform_name gt DATA DATA lt waveform_name gt Returned Parameters NR3 a total of 1024 data points Related Commands TRAC DATA TRAC DEL FUNC SHAP DATA keyword not implemented in earlier firmware revisions Use
125. ate e TRG agroup execute trigger By applying a signal with high to low transition to the Trig In1 SMA connector By generating an output transient that causes the Trig Outi SMA connector to output a pulse 6 8 12 Using the Output to Indicate Error Conditions The Discrete Fault Indicator output on the rear of the Lx Ls Series unit can be used to provide a control or status signal to an external device The following example illustrates the use of the DFI output to signal a current limit fault condition DFI output is the floating collector and emitter of an opto isolator It is pulled up internally using a pull up resistor to 5Vdc The pull up can be removed by removing jumper W1 on the 7004 716 range relay board The DFI output is active high so a logic 1 state indicates a fault condition The OCP detector has be to activated by sending the following command CURR PROT STATE ON To enable the DFI circuit send OUTP DFI SOURCE QUES 143 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il OUTP DFI STATE ON To enable the OCP signal to get to the STAT QUES register send STAT QUES PTR 2 STAT QUES ENAB 2 After sending these commands the DFI output will indicate when the RMS OCP goes active Note that when an OCP fault happens the PROT lamp comes on indicating that one has to send OUTP PROT CLEAR to re enable the source once the over current condition is removed Note also that the DFI output will stay low until the q
126. ate FREQuency LEVel This command will set the frequency level for the steady state operation Command Syntax MIL704 SSTate FREQuency LEVel Parameters none Examples MIL704 SST FREQ Query Syntax none MIL704 SSTate FREQuency MODulation This command will set the frequency modulation for the steady state operation Command Syntax MIL704 SSTate FREQuency MODulation Parameters none Examples MIL704 SST FREQ MOD Query Syntax none 8 6 4 MIL704 Transient Commands MIL704 TRANsient VOLTage LOW This command will set the low voltage level for the transient state operation Command Syntax MIL704 TRANseint VOLTage LOW Parameters none Examples MIL704 TRAN VOLT Query Syntax none MIL704 TRANsient VOLTage HIGH This command will set the high voltage level for the transient state operation Command Syntax MIL704 TRANseint VOLTage HIGH Parameters none Examples MIL704 TRAN VOLT HIGH Query Syntax none 199 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il MIL704 TRANsient FREQuency LOW This command will set the low frequency level for the transient state operation Command Syntax MIL704 TRANseint FREQuency LOW Parameters none Examples MIL704 TRAN FREQ Query Syntax none MIL704 TRANsient FREQuency HIGH This command will set the high frequency level for the transient state operation Command Syntax MIL704 TRANseint FREQuency HIGH Parameters none Examples MIL704 TRAN FREQ HIGH Query Syntax none 8
127. ation Telephone 800 733 5427 toll free in North America 858 450 0085 direct Fax 858 458 0267 Email sales programmablepower com service programmablepower com Web www programmablepower com This page intentionally left blank Important Safety Instructions Before applying power to the system verify that your product is configured properly for your particular application Hazardous voltages may be present when covers are removed Qualified personnel must use extreme caution when servicing this equipment Circuit boards test points and output voltages also be floating above WARNING below chassis ground _ equipment used contains ESD sensitive ports When installing equipment follow ESD Safety Procedures Electrostatic discharges might WARNING cause damage to the equipment Only qualified personnel who deal with attendant hazards in power supplies are allowed to perform installation and servicing Ensure that the AC power line ground is connected properly to the Power Rack input connector or chassis Similarly other power ground lines including those to application and maintenance equipment must be grounded properly for both personnel and equipment safety Always ensure that facility AC input power is de energized prior to connecting or disconnecting any cable In normal operation the operator does not have access to hazardous voltages within the chassis However depending on the user s app
128. ative transition filter that functions as described under STAT OPER NTR PTR commands in chapter 4 It is a read write register Event STAT OPER EVEN A register that latches any condition that is passed through the PTR or NTR filters Itis a read only register that is cleared when read Enable STAT OPER ENAB lt n gt A register that functions as a mask for enabling specific bits from the Event register It is a read write register Table 7 1 Operation Status registers The outputs of the Operation Status register group are logically ORed into the OPER ation summary bit 7 of the Status Byte register 150 P rogramming Manual Lx Ls Series II QUESTIONABLE STATUS No OV CONDITION PTR NTR EVENT ENABLE j 1 gi EUST OCR SOA UNR B Ba n u 28 RI 2 CL peak 10 Rail 11 CLrms _ 12 13 n u 14 15 Isum QUESTIONABLE INSTRUMENT ISUMMARY 1 identical register set for each phase ov PTR NTR EVENT ENABLE p f OCP 2 E SOA 3 UNR 4 OT 5 8 n u 9 SES ERU 01 02 CL Rail 11 CL rms 12 13 15 SERVICE i STANDARD EVENT STATUS p STATUS REQUEST EVENT ENABLE B OUTPUT BYTE ENABLE OPC 1 1 QUEUE nu 1 DATA DATA 2 4 DATA DDE 3 8 8 EXE 16
129. ature in C DIAGnostic RESet This commands forces a power on reset Command Syntax DIAGnostic RESet Parameters None Examples DIAG RES Related Commands HST DIAGnostic TEMPerature AMBient This query returns the temperature measured at the ambient sense thermistor in degrees C Query Syntax DIAGnostic TEMPerature AMBient Parameters None Examples DIAG TEMP AMB Returned Parameters cNR3 39 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 4 5 Display Subsystem This subsystem allows text information to be send to the power source LCD display Typical applications are to display operator prompts or program status information on the power source display Note The Display subsystem was added with firmware revision 1 21 If the power source revision is less than 1 21 these commands are not supported The firmware revision can be queried using the IDN Command The display on the Lx Ls Series has a maximum capacity of 32 ASCII characters both lower and upper case The display system does not perform automatic word wrap between the 2 lines of the LCD display The programming is responsible for formatting the two lines by padding the first line with spaces as needed It is not necessary to pad out the complete 32 characters as the power source will fill any remaining character positions with spaces automatically Subsystem Syntax DISPlay WINDow STATe on off 110 NORMal TEXT XXXXXX DISPlay T
130. ber of times the list is repeated before it completes For example to repeat a list 10 times use LIST COUNt 10 Entering INFinity makes the list repeat indefinitely At RST the count is set to 1 5 Determines how the list sequencing responds to triggers For a closely controlled sequence of output levels you can use a dwell paced list To cause the list to be paced by dwell time use LIST STEP AUTO As each dwell time elapses the next point is immediately output This is the RST setting If you need the output to closely follow asynchronous events then a trigger paced list is more appropriate In a trigger paced list the list advances one point for each trigger received To enable trigger paced lists use LIST STEP ONCE The dwell time associated with each point determines the minimum time that the output remains at that point If a trigger is received before the previous dwell time completes the trigger is ignored Therefore to ensure that no triggers are lost program the dwell time to zero 6 Usethe transient trigger system to trigger the list This is described in detail under Triggering Output Changes Section 6 7 6 7 Triggering Output Changes The AC source has two independent trigger systems One is used for generating output changes and the other is used for triggering measurements This section describes the output trigger system The measurement trigger system is described under Triggering Measurements The basic co
131. ce TRG or GET Group Execute Trigger EXTernal AC source s backpanel Trigger In1 SMA connector IMMediate trigger is generated as soon as the trigger system is initiated Command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence1 SOURce CRD TRIGger TRANsient SOURce lt CRD gt Parameters BUS EXTernal IMMediate RST Value BUS Examples TRIG SOUR BUS TRIG TRAN SOUR EXT Query Syntax TRIGger SEQuence1 SOURce TRIGger TRANsient SOURce Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands ABOR TRIG TRIG DEL TRIG SYNC TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT INIT CONT TRG 115 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce TRIGger SYNChronize SOURce These commands select the synchronizing trigger source in generating a step pulse or list output as follows IMMediate starts the transient output immediately unless a delay time other than 0 has been specified by TRIGger DELay In this case the transient output starts after the expiration of the delay time PHASe starts the transient output at the reference phase set by TRIG SYNC PHAS Command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce CRD TRIGger SYNChronize SOURce lt CRD gt Parameters IMMediate PHASe RST Value IMM Examples TRIG SYNC SOUR IMM TRIG SEQ2 SOUR PHAS Query Syntax TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce TRIGger SYNChronize SOURce Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands ABOR TRIG DEL TRIG SYNC TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT INIT CONT TRG WAI TRIGger SEQuence2 PHASe TRIGger SYNCHro
132. ce as follows BUS IEEE 488 device TRG or GET Group Execute Trigger EXTernal backpanel Trigger In1 SMA connector TTLTrg the signal driving the Trigger Out SMA Command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence3 SOURce CRD Command Syntax TRIGger ACQuire SOURce CRD Parameters BUS EXT TTLT RST Value BUS Examples TRIG ACQ SOUR BUS TRIG SEQ3 SOUR EXT Query Syntax TRIGger SEQuence3 SOURce TRIGger ACQuire SOURce Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands ABOR TRIG SOUR TRIG DEL TRIG SYNC TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT TRG WAI TRIGger SEQuence1 DEFine TRIGger SEQuence2 DEFine TRIGger SEQuence3 DEFine These commands define the names that are aliased to trigger sequences 1 2 and 3 The command accepts only TRANsient for sequence 1 SYNChronous for sequence 2 and ACQuire for sequence 3 as predefined names The query allows the user to query the instrument names aliased to sequences 1 2 and 3 Command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence1 DEFine TRANsient TRIGger SEQuence2 DEFine SYNChronous TRIGger SEQuence3 DEFine ACQuire Parameters TRANsient SYNChronous ACQuire Examples SEQ1 DEF TRAN SEQS DEF ACQ Query Syntax TRIGger SEQuence1 DEFine TRIGger SEQuence2 DEFine TRIGger SEQuence3 DEFine Returned Parameters lt CRD gt 117 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 5 Common Commands Common commands begin with an and consist of three letters command or three letters and a query Common commands a
133. char representing a byte each Ascii mode is needed for DCBS windows Dim i As Integer Dim j As Integer Dim iChar As Integer Dim expo As Long Dim mantisse As Long Dim expo val As Variant Dim mant f As Single Dim c 3 As Long Must use 32 bit integers to allow for intermediate result of 24 bit shift Dim sign As Boolean en E RR RP ER EB NER E E E e RI E RR Re NB e Const MANT MAX amp H7FFFFF Const EXPO MAX 2 126 On Error GoTo FloatConvError If bAsciiMode Then Retrieve ASC values from eight hex byte input data sData UCase sData For 0 To 3 c i 0 For j 0 To 1 iChar AscB Mid sData i 2 j 1 1 48 If iChar gt 9 Then iChar iChar 7 c i 16 j iChar Next 3 Next i Else Retrieve ASC values from four byte input data Note Don t use ASCB or ASCW functions as results will differ based on character sets even on non DCBS Windows Retrieve ASC values from four byte input data For 0 To 3 c i Asc Mid sData 1 1 Next i End If Get sign bit sign c 0 And amp H80 amp H80 Get exponent value less sign bit expo c 0 And amp H7F 2 Pick up exponent sign If c 1 And amp H80 amp H80 Then expo expo Or 1 48 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il get data less exponent sign bit 1 c 1 And amp H7F mantisse c 1 amp H10000 c 2 amp H100 c 3 mant f mantisse MANT MAX Process e
134. command will run the steady state repetitive voltage transients test Command Syntax MS704 NORMalI VOLTage TRANsient REPetitive Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN REP Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal FREQuency MODulation This command will run the steady state frequency modulation test Command Syntax MS704 NORMal FREQuency MODulation Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM FREQ MOD Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient ALL This command will run all the steady state frequency transients tests Command Syntax MS704 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient ALL Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM FREQ TRAN Query Syntax none 210 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II MS704 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient OVER This command will run the steady state over frequency transients test Command Syntax MS704 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient OVER Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM FREQ TRAN OVER Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient UNDer This command will run the steady state under frequency transients test Command Syntax MS704 NORMaI FREQuency TRANsient UNDer Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM FREQ TRAN UND Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient COMBination This command will run the steady state combination frequency transients test Command Syntax MS704 NORMaI FREQuency TRANsient COMBination Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM FREQ TRAN COMB Query Syntax none 211
135. cquired by the measurement trigger The following measurement trigger sources can be selected BUS selects IEEE 488 bus triggers EXTernal selects the external Trigger In1 SMA connector TTLTrg selects the signal driving the Trigger Outi SMA connector 141 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 6 8 7 SCPI Measurement Triggering Nomenclature As previously explained under Triggering Output Changes the AC source uses the following sequence name and alias for the measurement trigger system This alias can be used instead of the sequence form Sequence Form Alias SEQuence3 ACQuire 6 8 8 Measurement Trigger System Model Figure 6 3 is a model of the measurement trigger system The rectangular boxes represent states The arrows show the transitions between states These are labeled with the input or event that causes the transition to occur 4 ABOR gt IDLE STATE 4 RST 4 RCL INIT IMM INITIATED STATE TRIGGER RECEIVED DATA ACQUISITION Figure 6 3 Model of Measurement triggers 6 8 9 Initiating the Measurement Trigger System When the AC source is turned on the trigger system is in the idle state In this state the trigger system ignores all triggers Sending the following commands at any time returns the trigger system to the Idle state ABORt RST RCL INITiate commands move the trigger system from the state to the Initiated state
136. create a name for the waveform then use the TRACe DATA command to send the list of 1024 amplitude points The waveform can then be selected using the FUNCtion command For example a waveform named Distortion can be created with TRACe DEFine DISTORTION TRACe DATA DISTORTION n1 n2 n3 1024 128 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il where n1 n1024 are the data points that define the relative amplitudes of exactly one cycle of the waveform The first data point defines the amplitude that will be output at 0 degrees phase reference Data points can be in any arbitrary units The AC source scales the data to an internal format that removes the dc component and ensures that the correct ac rms voltage is output when the waveform is selected When queried trace data is returned as normalized values in the range of 1 Waveform data is stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained when input power is removed Up to 50 user defined waveforms may be created and stored See section 6 10 for programming example Because waveform shape commands are coupled with the voltage commands changing waveforms without changing the programmed voltage may result in an error if the resulting peak voltage amplitude exceeds the maximum voltage rating of the AC source Refer to Coupled Commands for more information 6 2 2 Individual Phases The following functions can be controlled separately in each phase e VOLTage e CURRent e PHASe MEAS
137. creen select the LANG field This field can be toggled between SPCI or APE using the shuttle knob e From the bus send the following commands depending on the present mode of operation Present Mode To change to other language mode send APE mode SCPI SCPI mode SYST LANG APEN Table 8 1 APE to SCPI mode change commands Introduction Remote programming through the IEEE 488 Interface GPIB consists of sending the unit address and the proper ASCII alphanumeric characters to identify the parameter and the numerical value or other argument The description of the abbreviations for GPIB messages used in this section is listed in Table 3 10 These abbreviations must not be confused with the device dependent abbreviations used to describe the AC Power System operating parameters ex FRQ Frequency etc 163 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 2 2 L Series Backward Compatibility Issues Although every effort has been made to mimic the L Series bus operation as closely as possible the end user should be aware that the Ls uses a completely different controller and operating system compared to the L Series This inevitably leads to subtle differences of execution of the same application programs on each unit Specifically the following discrepancies should be noted and may require slight modifications of programs that may be affected by them Discrepancies 1 APE Programming commands received during the execu
138. cy LEVel 200 MIL704 SSTate FREQuency MODulation 200 MIL704 SSTate UNBalance 199 MIL704 SSTate WAVeform DISTortion 200 MIL704 SSTate MODulation 199 MIL704 SSTate PHASe UNBalance 199 MIL704 SSTate VOLTage LEVell 199 MIL704 TRANsient F REQuency HIGH 201 MIL704 TRANsient F REQuency LOW 201 MIL704 TRANsient VOLTage HIGH 200 MIL704 TRANsient VOLTage LOW 200 MIL704 VERSion sss 198 MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient COMBination 215 MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient OVER 214 MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient UNDer 215 MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient ALL 214 MS704 ABNormal LlIMits HIGH 213 MS704 ABNormal LIMits LOW 213 MS704 ABNormal LIMits NOMinal 213 MS704 ABNormal LIMits ALL 2138 MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient COMBi TRATION icut e 214 MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient OVER 214 MS704 ABNormal VOLTage TRANsient ALL inis A Me E EI 213 5704 216 MS704 EMERgency LIMit HIGH 216 MS704 EMERgency LIMit NOMinal 216 MS704 EMERgency LIMit ALL 216 5
139. cy changes can be obtained by sending MAXimum or INFinity The SCPI keyword INFinity is represented by the number 9 9E37 Command Syntax SOURce FREQuency SLEW TRIGgered lt NRf gt INFinity Parameters 1E 3 to 9 9E37 INFinity MINimum MAXimum Unit HZ Hertz per second RST Value MAXimum Examples FREQ SLEW TRIG 75 FREQ SLEW TRIG Query Syntax SOURce FREQuency SLEW TRIG Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands FREQ SLEW MODE FREQ 74 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II FREQuency TRIGgered This command programs the frequency that the output will be set to during a triggered step or pulse transient Command Syntax SOURce FREQuency TRIGgered lt NRf gt Parameters Refer to specifications table in User Manual Unit HZ Hertz RST Value 60 Hz Example FREQ TRIG 50 Query Syntax SOURce FREQuency TRIGgered Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands FREQ FREQ MODE 75 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 4 18 Source Subsystem Function This subsystem programs the output function of the AC source Subsystem Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe IMMediate lt shape gt Sets the periodic waveform shape SIN SQU CSIN lt user defined gt MODE lt mode gt Sets the waveform shape mode FIX STEP PULS LIST TRIGgered shape Sets the triggered transient shape SIN SQU CSIN lt user defined gt CSINusoid n THD Sets the 96 of peak at which the clipped sine clips or 9
140. d Offset 4096 4096 DATA POINTS Offset 2048 4096 DATA POINTS Offset 0 4096 DATA POINTS Offset tM 0 to 249 4096 DATA POINTS Acquisition Time gt Trigger Moment Figure 6 4 Pre and Post Event Triggering 147 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 6 10 Downloading Arbitrary Waveforms The Lx Series supports the use of arbitrary waveforms The same is true for the Ls Series if the ADV option is installed Up to 50 user defined waveforms can be downloaded to the Lx by assigning a user defined name of up to 12 characters long and sending the formatted waveform data over the bus File names longer than 12 characters will be truncated on the WAVEFORM LCD display and make it difficult to select the right waveform from the front panel especially if the first 12 characters are the same Note Avoid using names that conflict with standard waveforms such as SIN SINE CLIPPED SQUARE Once downloaded user waveforms can be recalled from either the front panel using the MENU key or over the bus using the FUNCtion command See section 6 2 1 6 10 1 Waveform Record Data Format The total number of datapoints required to define a waveform register is 1024 Each data points should be scaled between 1 000 and 1 000 If scaled differently the Lx Ls controller will automatically scale the data received The TRAC DATA command is used to se
141. d Pending operations are complete when e All commands sent before WAI have been executed This includes overlapped commands Most commands are sequential and are completed before the next command is executed Overlapped commands are executed in parallel with other commands Commands that affect output voltage or state relays and trigger actions are overlapped with subsequent commands sent to the AC source The WAI command prevents subsequent commands from being executed before any overlapped commands have been completed e All triggered actions are completed and the trigger system returns to the Idle state WAI can be aborted only by sending the an IEEE 488 DCL Device Clear command Command Syntax WAI Parameters None Related Commands OPC 125 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 6 Programming Examples 6 1 Introduction This chapter contains examples on how to program your AC source Simple examples show you how to program e output functions such as voltage frequency and phase e the transient waveform generator e internal and external triggers e measurement functions e user defined waveforms e the status and protection functions These examples in this chapter are generic SCPI commands See chapter 2 for information about encoding the commands as language strings Where appropriate optional commands are shown for clarity in the examples Programming the Output Power on Initialization When the
142. default setting can be achieve by selecting the Mac address screen and press the set key followed by the Enter key Press the Enter key again to confirm The IP address is set to DHCP or AUTO IP Table 3 1 LAN Setting screens Once you have an IP address you can test the IP address from your Windows PC An easy way to do so is to use the ping utility under MS DOS To do so bring up a DOS window using the start menu Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt At the command prompt type ping lt IP address gt This will send an IP ping request to the power source For this to work the power source must be turned on and connected to the same network as the PC Also the power source interface configuration must be set to use a baud rate of 460 800 If everything is working it will look like this 31 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II Microsoft R Windows DOS C Copyright Microsoft Corp 1990 2001 C gt ping 100 10 1 63 Pinging 100 10 1 63 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 100 10 Reply from 100 10 Reply from 100 10 Reply from 100 10 63 bytes 32 time lt lms TTL 64 63 bytes 32 time lt lms TTL 64 63 bytes 32 time lt lms TTL 64 1 1 1 1 63 bytes 32 time lt lms TTL 64 Ping statistics for 100 10 1 63 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Oms Maximum Oms Average Oms Figure 3 3 Pinging AC Source
143. ds internal bus user defined wave shapes with higher voltage crest factors Reduce programmed RMS value Slew time exceed dwell Time needed to slew Check dwell times in transient list to final value is less settings Increase dwell time or than dwell time change slew rate for affected parameter Illegal during transient Operation requested Wait till transient execution is not available while completed or abort transient transient is running execution first Output relay must be Transient Close relay before attempting closed programmed with transient operation output relay open Clock and sync must be Operation not Switch to internal sync Default internal possible with external clock 820 Input buffer full Too much data Break up data in smaller blocks received Amplifier unbalance Hardware error An Check amplifier balance adjustment amplifier has an If error persists contact Cl service at overload condition service programmablepower com Waveform harmonics Harmonic contents of Reduce harmonic content or reduce limit user defined wave fundamental frequency programmed shape is too high and could damage amplifier output stage Amplifier fault An amplifier failure Determine which amplifier is at fault Can be reported at with self test or checking LED on any time Relay Board Replace amplifier Auxiliary down One or more auxiliary Turn on all auxiliary units units is not powered up or
144. e have been executed This includes overlapped commands Most commands are sequential and are completed before the next command is executed Overlapped commands are executed in parallel with other commands Commands that affect output voltage or state relays and trigger actions are overlapped with subsequent commands sent to the Lx Ls Series The OPC command provides notification that all overlapped commands have been completed e All triggered actions are completed and the trigger system returns to the Idle state does not prevent processing of subsequent commands but Bit 0 will not be set until all pending operations are completed The query causes the interface to place an ASCII 1 in the Output Queue when all pending operations are completed Command Syntax Parameters None Query Syntax Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Related Commands TRIG WAI 5 5 This query requests the AC Source to identify any options that are installed Options are identified by number A 0 indicates no options are installed Query Syntax Returned Parameters lt AARD gt 5 6 PSC 120 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II This command controls the automatic clearing at power on of the Service Request Enable and the Standard Event Status Enable registers see chapter 7 under Programming the Status and Event Registers for register details PSC ON 1 prevents the register conten
145. e active path to the root OUTPut But if you enter OUTPut STATe OFF then the active path remains at STATe This allows you to send OUTPut STATe OFF PROTection CLEar in one message If you tried to send OUTPut OFF PROTection CLEar the header path would return to OUTPut instead of PROTection The optional header SOURce precedes the current frequency function phase pulse list and voltage subsystems This effectively makes CURRent FREQuency FUNCtion PHASe PULse LIST and VOLTage root level commands Moving Among Subsystems In order to combine commands from different subsystems you need to be able to restore the active path to the root You do this with the root specifier For example you could clear the output protection and check the status of the Operation Condition register as follows OUTPut PROTection CLEAr STATus OPERation CONDition Because the root specifier resets the command parser to the root you can use the root specifier and do the same thing in one message OUTPut PROTection CLEAr STATus OPERation CONDition The following message shows how to combine commands from different subsystems as well as within the same subsystem VOLTage LEVel 70 PROTection 80 CURRent LEVel 3 PROTection STATe ON Note the use of the optional header LEVel to maintain the correct path within the voltage and current subsystems and the use of the root specifier to move between subsystems Note The Enhanced Tree Wa
146. e range If the range and voltage amplitude are to be programmed by the same data string the RNG header and argument must precede the AMP header or a syntax error will be generated The 175 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II following example will select the 270 range from the 135 270 range pair with an upper amplitude limit of 210 volts RNG210 To program External Synchronization SNC optional The SNC header is used with the EXT argument to synchronize the phase A output to an external sync input The phase A output will be phase referenced to the sync input with the displacement equal to the A value The following ASCII string will program the phase A output to 0 degree relative to the external sync input and select the external sync mode PHZAO SNC EXT Sending the ASCII string SNC INT will disable the sync input To program External Clock CLK optional The CLK header has an argument of either EXT or INT The CLK header with the EXT argument will make one AC Power System a slave to another system The slave will operate at the same frequency as the master Phase A of the slave will be related to phase A of the master by the PHZ A value of the slave NOTE The clock option is only available if the associated power systems have the LKM option The following ASCII string will enable the CLOCK and LOCK inputs to the associated slave AC Power System CLK EXT NOTE If there is no signal at the CLOCK input at the rear pane
147. e CAL MEAS CURR query for phase 1 A except it can not be used to perform a calibration It does not initiate a calibration Use the CAL MEAS CURR command to do this instead Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent SPHase Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples CAL MEAS CURR SPH Related Commands CAL SAVE CAL MEAS VOLT CALibrate MEASure VOLTage Phase Selectable This command can only be used in calibration mode It initiates the calibration of the ac voltage metering circuits The query format returns the actual calibration coefficient Use the INST SEL or INST NSEL to select the desired phase 37 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage lt Nrf gt Parameters Reference instrument voltage reading Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure VOLTage Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples CAL MEAS VOLT Related Commands CAL SAVE CAL MEAS CURR CALibrate PASSword This command can only be used to unlock the calibration mode Once unlocked non query calibration commands will be accepted Query commands are always accepted Command Syntax CALibrate PASSword lt NRf gt Parameters lt high voltage range gt default Examples CAL PASS 300 Related Commands none CALibrate SAVE This command can only be used in calibration mode It saves any new calibration constants after a current or voltage calibration procedure has been completed in nonvolatile memory Command Syntax CALibrate SAVE Parameters
148. e CONTinuous SEQuence 115 INITiate NAME 115 115 INSTrument COUPIe 43 43 43 IP address ue eet ess 29 L L Series 165 LAN Option IP address ene 29 Port number occae ees 33 Settings cetero nete 31 45 45 22 44 40 44 44 LIMit FREQuency LOW 44 PIMIEPEHASe eeiam 44 EIST COUNLE ciuitate dice pete dines 81 a t hm enero 81 462 2 2 0 81 02 81 82 5 82 LIST FREQuency SLEW POINIts 82 HIST MODE ea eic 82 83 83 LIST SHAPE
149. e Wizard dialog appears select the No not this time option Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device Click Next to continue The drivers are not available on line Click on Next button to continue 22 P rogramming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Ls Lx AC Source If your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue Select the second choice from the list to install the driver by browsing to a specific location Click on Next button to continue Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options ey Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include
150. e but if regulation cannot be maintained the output does not trip off Instead a status bit is set in the Event Status register to indicate the AC source is out of regulation This mode requires firmware revision 0 98 or higher Note that the command format will take either alphanumeric or integer data but the query form always returns numeric data Command Syntax Parameters HST Value Examples Query Syntax Returned Parameters Related Commands SOURce VOL Tage ALC STATe source ON OFF REG 0 1 2 REG VOLT ALC ON SOURce VOL Tage ALC lt NR1 gt VOLT 91 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il VOLTage ALC SOURce These commands select the source from which the output voltage is sensed The following voltage sense sources can be selected INTernal This senses the voltage at the output of the power amplifier on the inboard side of the output disconnect relay EXTernal This senses the output voltage at the user s sense terminals which allows remote voltage sensing at the load Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage ALC SOURce lt source gt Parameters INTernal EXTernal RST Value INTernal Examples VOLT ALC SOUR EXT Query Syntax SOURce VOL Tage ALC SOURce Returned Parameters CRD Related Commands VOLT SENS DET Note The VOLT ALC SOUR command is an alias for the VOLT SENS SOUR command Both perform the same function This is done for backward compatability with the Agilent 6834B V
151. e data error Data received is not Check programming manual for a number correct command syntax Invalid character in Number received Check programming manual for number contains ils numeric correct command syntax character s 123 Exponent too large Exponent in Check programming manual for exceeds limits correct parameter range Numeric data not Number received Check programming manual for allowed when number is not correct command syntax allowed 168 Block data not allowed Block data was sent Check programming manual for correct command syntax 200 Execution error Command could not Command may be inconsistent with be executed mode of operation Invalid while in local Command issued but Put instrument in remote state before unit is not in remote issuing GPIB commands state Command protected Command is locked Some commands are supported by out the unit but are locked out for protection of settings and are not user accessible 210 Trigger error Problem with trigger Unit could not generate trigger for system transient execution or measurement 211 Trigger ignored Trigger request has Trigger setup incorrect or unit was not been ignored armed when trigger was received Check transient system or measurement trigger system settings Init ignored Initialization request Unit was told to go to armed state but has been ignored was unable to do so Could be caused by incorrect transient system or meas
152. e if an argument is required 8 3 2 ABLE Language details The following commands are supported by the ABL option SYNTAX DESCRIPTION VOLTA n Programs voltage on phase A 9023 VOLTB n Programs voltage on phase B 9023 VOLTC n Programs voltage on phase C 9023 VOLTS n Programs voltage on all phases 9023 or on phase A on 9012 CURL n Set the current limit value followed by numeric value 9012 CURLA n Set the current limit value followed by numeric value 9023 183 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II SYNTAX DESCRIPTION CURLB lt gt Set the current limit value followed by numeric value 9023 CURLC lt n gt Set the current limit value followed by numeric value 9023 CURLS lt gt Set the current limit value followed by numeric value for all phases on 3 phase models 9023 FREQ lt n gt Set the frequency value followed by numeric value PANGA lt gt Programs the phase A angle on a LKS relative to the Master This command can only be send to the auxiliary unit in a clock and lock system See SYNC command PANGB lt n gt Programs the phase B angle with respect to phase A 9023 PANGC n Programs the phase C angle with respect to phase A 9023 RNG n Set the voltage range value For single phase power sources 0 Low voltage range 1 High voltage range For three phase power
153. e name Variable name illegal Use ASCII characters only Hardware related Check hardware for proper operation error Memory error Waveform memory May be the result of incomplete user checksum error defined waveform download Check interface and try downloading waveform again Successful download may clear this error condition Alternatively use TRAC DEL ALL command to clear waveform memory 314 Save recall memory User setup register Store setup in same register again lost contents lost 315 Configuration memory Hardware Contact AMETEK service department lost configuration settings at service programmablepower com lost to obtain instructions on restoring configuration data 330 Self test failed Internal error Contact AMETEK service department at service programmablepower com Queue overflow Message queue full Too many message Read status using SYST ERR query until 0 No Error is received indicating queue empty 400 Query error Unable to complete Check programming manual for query correct query format and parameters Query INTERRUPTED Query issued but Check application program for correct response not read flow Response must be read after each query to avoid this error 420 Query Query incomplete Check for terminator after query UNTERMINATED command 430 Query DEADLOCKED Query cannot be Check application program for completed multiple queries 440 Query Query incomplete Check for
154. e of these commands can be affected by the settings of the others Refer to the tables under PULSe HOLD for an explanation of how these commands affect each other Subsystem Syntax SOURce PULSe COUNt n INFinity Selects transient pulse count DCYCle n Selects pulse duty cycle HOLD WIDTh DCYCle Selects parameter that is held constant PERiod lt n gt Selects pulse period when the count is greater than 1 WIDTh n Selects width of the pulses PULSe COUNt This command sets the number of pulses that are output when a triggered output transient occurs The command accepts parameters in the range 1 through 2E8 If INFinity or MAXimum is sent the output pulse repeats indefinitely Command Syntax SOURce PULSe COUNt lt NRf gt INFinity Parameters 1 to 2E8 MINimum MAXimum INFinity RST Value 1 Examples PULS COUN PULS COUN MIN PULS COUN INF Query Syntax SOURce PULS COUNt Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands PULS DCYC PULS HOLD PULS PER PULS WIDT PULSe DCYCle This command sets the duty cycle of the triggered output pulse The duty cycle units are specified in percent Command Syntax SOURce PULSe DCYCle lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 100 MINimum MAXimum RST Value 50 Examples PULS DCYC 75 PULS DCYC MAX Query Syntax SOURce PULSe DCYCle Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands PULS COUN PULS HOLD PULS PER PULS WIDT PULSe HOLD This command specifies whether the pulse
155. e transfer mode only applies to MEAS ARR VOLT and MEAS ARR CURR queries All other measurement queries always return ASCII data Note that at power on the default mode is always set to binary BIN 47 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Syntax MEASure ARRay MODe Parameters BIN ASCii Examples MEAS ARR MOD ASC Related Commands MEAS ARR VOLT MEAS ARR CURR Note The MEAS ARR MOD command is provided to allow waveform data transfers in ASCII on DBCS versions of MS Windows Examples of DBCS versions are Chinese Korean Japanese etc On most Windows versions the binary mode can be used as it reduces the amount of data transferred and thus provides better throughput The ASCII mode will double the number of characters transferred so provisions for a larger receive buffer on the PC may have to be made On the Lx Ls the full acquisition data size that can be sent with one command in BIN mode is 16KB in ASC mode 32KB The binary data must be converted to a single precision floating point notation Sample VB6 code is shown on the next page Conversion function sample VB6 Converting waveform data from either transfer mode to a single precision value can be accomplished using the following sample routine Public Function StringToIEEEFloat ByVal sData As String ByVal bAsciiMode As Boolean As bAsciiMode flag is used if data is received as 8 ascii chars representing Hex 0 9 A F If bAsciiMode flag is false then data is process as 4
156. e transition filter STATus PRESet This command sets the Enable PTR and NTR registers of the status groups to their power on values These values are Enable Registers all bits set to 0 OFF PTR Registers all defined bits set to 1 ON NTR Registers all bits set to 0 OFF Command Syntax STATus PRESet Parameters None Examples STAT PRES Bit Name not CV not WTG used used 32 wem a CAL Interface is computing new calibration constants 98 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II WTG Interface is waiting for a trigger CV Output voltage is regulated Table 4 3 Bit Configuration of Status Operation Registers STATus OPERation This query returns the value of the Operation Event register The Event register is a read only register which holds latches all events that are passed by the Operation NTR and or PTR filter Reading the Operation Event register clears it Query Syntax STATus OPERation EVENt Parameters None Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Register Value Examples STAT OPER EVEN Related Commands 5 STAT OPER NTR STAT OPER PTR STATus OPERation CONDition This query returns the value of the Operation Condition register This is a read only register which holds the real time unlatched operational status of the Lx Ls Series Query Syntax STATus OPERation CONDition Parameters None Examples STAT OPER COND Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Register value STATus OPERa
157. ecognized on a high to low transition of the input signal The minimum pulse width of the signal is 1 microsecond To select the Trigger In connector as the trigger source use TRIGger SEQuence1 SOURce EXTernal or TRIGger TRANsient SOURce EXTernal TRIGger SEQuence3 SOURce EXTernal or TRIGger ACQuire SOURce EXTernal Trigger Out SMA This chassis referenced digital output can be programmed to supply a pulse output at the leading or trailing edge of a step or pulse or at the leading edge of any point in a list sequence The output signal is nominally a 10 microsecond low true pulse To enable the Trigger Out connector use OUTPut TTLTrg STATe ON At RST the Trigger Out connector is off To select a trigger source for the Trigger Out connector use OUTPut TTLTrg SOURce EOT LIST BOT specifies that the pulse is output at the beginning of a transient This is the RST setting EOT specifies that the pulse is output at the end of a transient LIST specifies that the pulse position is defined by the LIST TTLTrg command You can also specify the Trigger Out connector as a trigger source for measurement trigger sequences Use TRIGger SEQuence3 SOURce TTLT TRIGger ACQuire SOURce TTLT 158 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II OUTF TTLT SOUR OUTP TTLT STAT pert OFF TRIGGER OUT1 MEASUREMENT FOR n ACQUISITION TRIGGER Strobe TREE TRIGGER SYSTEM TRIGGER OUTPUT TRANSIEN
158. ecomes the immediate value In Pulse mode the functions return to their immediate value during the low portion of the pulse 131 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II If there are no further pulses the immediate value remains in effect In List mode the functions return to their immediate value at the completion of the list You can mix FIXed STEP PULSe and LIST modes among most functions When a trigger is received each function will react in a manner defined by its mode However this is subject to the following limitation to ensure the proper output voltage in all cases The ac voltage waveform shape and voltage slew functions cannot be set to Step or Pulse mode if one of them is set to List mode IMMediate leve IER RARE TA CEN ES Tri s d l riggers ignored output always set to FIXED mode Hn I immediate command levels TRIGered level IMMediate level f At trigger the triggered level becomes the new immediate level 1 STEP mode TRIGered level IMMediate level At trigger the triggered PULSE mode level is active during the pulse width portion of the pulse waveform f IMMediate level 111 LiSTmode A Af At trigger the list starts When list compl
159. ed Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent NEUTral FETCh CURRent NEUTral These queries return the dc current in the neutral output terminal of a three phase AC source Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent NEUTral DC FETCh SCALar CURRent NEUTral DC Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR NEUT FETC CURR NEUT Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent NEUTral AC FETCh CURRent NEUTral AC These queries return the ac rms current in the neutral output terminal of a three phase AC source Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent NEUTral AC FETCh SCALar CURRent NEUTral AC Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR NEUT AC FETC CURR NEUT AC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent NEUTral ACDC FETCh CURRent NEUTral ACDC These queries return the ac dc rms current in the neutral output terminal of a three phase AC source Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent NEUTral ACDC FETCh SCALar CURRent NEUTral ACDC Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR NEUT ACDC FETC CURR NEUT ACDC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent NEUTral HARMonic FETCh CURRent NEUTral HARMonic These queries return the rms amplitude of the Nth harmonic of current in the neutral output terminal of a three phase AC source The parameter is the desired harmonic number Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc component A value of 1 return
160. en dropping the output voltage to zero and changing the range relay state See the PONSetup RELay command for details Your application program should allow for this delay default is 0 1 sec or 100 msec Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage RANGe lt NRf gt Parameters 150 300 RST Value MAX Examples VOLT RANG 150 VOLT RANG MIN Query Syntax SOURce VOLTage RANGe Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands VOLT PONS REL 94 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il VOLTage REFerance This command select the referance Voltage The following voltage refernace can be selected INTernal This is the internal voltage referance for programmable voltage EXTernal This is the external DC voltage referance input to program the output voltage 0 to 10 voltage represents 0 to full scale output voltage This is the RPV option Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage Refernace source Parameters INTernal EXTernal RST Value INTernal Examples VOLT REF EXT Query Syntax SOURce VOLTage REFerance Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands VOLT ALC SOUR OFF Note The VOLT ALC SOUR command must be set to off prior to selection of the referance to external 95 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II VOLTage SENSe SOURce These commands select the source from which the output voltage is sensed The following voltage sense sources can be selected INTernal This senses the voltage at the output of the power amplifier on the
161. ent ISUMmary PTRansition lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 32727 Default Value 0 Examples STAT QUES INST ISUM NTR 16 STAT QUES INST ISUM PTR 512 Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary NTRansition STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary PTRansition Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Register value Related Commands STAT QUES INST ISUM ENAB 104 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 24 System Commands The system commands control the system level functions of the Lx Ls Series Subsystem Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess Set GPIB address ADDRess Set LAN IP address APPLy Apply the change in setting DEFault Set LAN to a default known setting DESCription Set user description DNSaddress Set LAN DNS addres GWADdress Set LAN Gateway 5 Set LAN Host bits PASSword Set LAN password PORT Set LAN socket port address SERial BAUD Set the baud rate PARity Set the parity type BITS Set number of bits SBITSs Set number of stop bits CONFiguration Queries the source configuration data NOUTputs lt n gt Selects the number of output phases ETIMe Returns accumulated on time ERRor Returns the error number and error string LANGuage Sets the programming language LOCal Go to local mode RS 232 only REMote Go to remote mode RS 232 only RW Lock Local Lock out front panel LOCAL button RS 232 only TEMPerature Returns temperature inside unit VERSion Returns the SCPI version numb
162. equency Instantaneous frequency changes can be obtained by sending MAXimum or INFinity The SCPI keyword INFinity is represented by the number 9 9E37 Command Syntax SOURce FREQuency SLEW IMMediate lt NRf gt INFinity Parameters 1E 3 to 9 9E37 INFinity MAXimum Unit HZ Hertz per second RST Value MAXimum Examples FREQ SLEW IMM 75 FREQ SLEW MAX Query Syntax SOURce FREQuency SLEW Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands FREQ SLEW MODE FREQ FREQuency SLEW MODE This command determines how the frequency slew rate is controlled during a triggered output transient The choices are FIXed The frequency slew rate is unaffected by a triggered output transient STEP The frequency slew rate is programmed to the value set by FREQuency TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs PULSe The frequency slew rate is changed to the value set by FREQuency TRIGgered for a duration determined by the pulse commands LIST The frequency slew rate is controlled by the frequency list when a triggered transient occurs Command Syntax SOURce FREQuency SLEW MODE mode Parameters FIXed STEP PULSe LIST RST Value FIXed Examples FREQ SLEW MODE FIX Query Syntax SOURce FREQuency SLEW MODE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands FREQ FREQ SLEW TRIG FREQency SLEW TRIGgered This command sets the rate at which frequency changes during a triggered output transient Instantaneous frequen
163. er 154 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 7 5 Standard Event Status Group This group consists of an Event register and an Enable register that are programmed by Common commands The Standard Event register latches events relating to interface communication status see Figure 7 1 It is a read only register that is cleared when read The Standard Event Enable register functions similarly to the enable registers of the Operation and Questionable status groups Command Action ESE programs specific bits in the Standard Event Enable register 5 clears the Standard Event Enable register at power on ESR reads and clears the Standard Event register The PON Power On Bit The PON bit in the Standard Event register is set whenever the AC source is turned on The most common use for PON is to generate an SRQ at power on following an unexpected loss of power To do this bit 7 of the Standard Event Enable register must be set so that a power on event registers in the ESB Standard Event Summary Bit Bit 5 of the Service Request Enable register must be set to permit an SRQ to be generated and PSC OFF must be sent The commands to accomplish these conditions are PSC OFF 128 SRE 32 155 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 7 6 Status Byte Register This register summarizes the information from all other status groups as defined in the IEEE 488 2 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instru
164. er 105 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess This command will set the GPIB address Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess lt NRF gt Parameters 0 to 31 lt listen address gt Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 2 Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess This command will set the LAN IP address The query format returns the IP address set To query the actual IP address used by the LAN interface in case the IP address is not static but assigned by a DHCP server the NCON parameter Network Connection Setting must be added to the query The default value is 0 0 0 0 Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess lt NRF gt Parameters ddd ddd ddd ddd lt IP address gt Example SYST COMM LAN ADDR 255 255 167 2 Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN ADDR SYST COMM LAN ADDR NCON Returned Parameters lt CRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN APPLy This command will apply the changes in LAN setting The controller will go to reset condition and the new LAN setting will take effect Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN APPLy Parameters none Example SYST COMM LAN APPL Query Syntax no query for this command Returned Parameters none SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DEFault This command will apply the changes in LAN setting to the default setting The controller will go to reset condition and the default LAN setting will take effect Both IP address and Gate way address are set to ze
165. es 1 The Square wave command WVF SQW is accepted only if the advance feature option is installed Option ADV 2 The System configuration language bit must be set to enable the APE option See OPT Command in SCPI syntax section of this manual SYSTem LANGuage APENglish will change the language to APE when in SCPI mode SCPI will change the language to SCPI when in APE mode Power source configuration queries should be done in SCPI mode However the TLK CFGA APE command will respond with a configuration byte similar to that of the L series for backward compatibility 6 The CFGA command will be accepted but changes to the GPIB listen address will not take effect until input power on the Ls unit is cycled Power on Initialization If the Ls Series AC power source is powered up in APE mode the normal recall power up setting from a user assigned setup register will NOT take place Instead a power on initialization similar to that of the L Series is used as shown below The factory default values for APE power on settings are ALMA 0 FLMA60 Hz INIA 0 V INIC n A where n is the maximum current limit of the system at a given range APE Mode SCPI Mode ALMA 0 or 8 PONSetup VRANge voltage range FLMA initial frequency PONSetup FREQuency initial frequency INIA initial voltage PONSetup VOLTage initial voltage INIC initial current limit PONSetup CURRent initial current limit Table 8 2 APE versus
166. es without the ADV option and or MODE option 1 2 1 Firmware differences The Lx Series is fully featured and supports all commands listed in the programming manual The Ls Series provides most basic functions in its standard configurations More advanced features can be added by specifying the ADV advanced option If the ADV option is installed all commands listed in this programming manual are supported If not commands related to arbitrary waveforms and harmonic analysis measurements are not supported and will generate a 113 Syntax Error message 1 2 2 Hardware differences In addition to the firmware differences described the following hardware differences exist between the standard Lx Ac source and the Ls AC source e Lxhas a 150V 300 V rms output range pair Optional ranges of 135 270 HV option and 200 400 EHV option are available at time of order e Lshasa 135 V 270 V rms output range pair Optional ranges of 156 312 HV option and 200 400 EHV option are available at time of order e The Lx rear panel connector labeling is compliant with the California Instruments iL Series which it replaces and the HP Agilent model 6834B e The Ls rear panel connector labeling is compliant with the California Instruments L Series The Lx Series comes standard with both GPIB USB and RS232C interfaces An optional Ethernet interface LAN option is available e The Ls Series Il comes standard with USB and RS2
167. essages There are two types of SCPI messages program and response A program message consists of one or more properly formatted SCPI commands sent from the controller to the AC source The message which may be sent at any time requests the AC source to perform some action A response message consists of data in a specific SCPI format sent from the AC source to the controller The AC source sends the message only when commanded by a program message called a query Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 2 2 3 The SCPI Command Tree As previously explained the basic SCPI communication method involves sending one or more properly formatted commands from the SCPI command tree to the instrument as program messages Figure 2 1 shows a portion of a subsystem command tree from which you access the commands located along the various paths you can see the complete tree in appendix A Root m OUTPut STATe COUPling DFI STATe SOURce PROTection CLEar DELay STATus OPERation EVEN CONDiition Figure 2 1 Partial Command Tree The Root Level Note the location of the ROOT node at the top of the tree Commands at the root level are at the top level of the command tree The SCPI interface is at this location when e the AC source is powered on adevice clear DCL is sent to the AC source e the SCPI interface encounters a message terminator LF e the SCPI in
168. etes output returns to VV VY n immediate level 650 Vv Y step 1 Trigger List Applied Complete Figure 6 1 Model of transient system 6 5 Step and Pulse Transients Proceed as follows to setup step and pulse transients 1 Set the functions that you do not want to generate transients to FIXed mode A convenient way to do this is with the RST command Then set the mode of the function that will generate the transient to STEP or PULSe as required For example to enable the voltage function to generate a single triggered output voltage change use RST VOLTage MODE STEP 132 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 2 Set the triggered level of the function that will generate the transient For example if the previously programmed voltage function is going to step the output voltage amplitude to 135 volts upon receipt of a trigger use VOLTage TRIGger 135 3 Select the trigger source that will generate the trigger For example to select the external Trigger In1 SMA connector as the trigger source use TRIGger TRANsient SOURce EXTernal Trigger sources are discussed in detail under Triggering Output Changes 4 Only perform this step if you have selected PULSE as the transient mode in Step 1 Specify the pulse count the pulse period and then either the duty cycle or the pulse width using the following commands e PULSe COUNt 1 specifies 1 output pulse e P
169. eturned Parameters lt NR1 gt Example LIST TTLT POIN Related Commands LIST TTLT LIST VOLTage This command specifies the output voltage points in a list The voltage points are given in the command parameters which are separated by commas The order in which the points are entered determines the sequence in which the list will be output when a list transient is triggered Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied ABORT The maximum peak voltage that the AC source can output is 425 V peak This includes any combination of voltage voltage offset and function shape values Therefore the maximum value that can be programmed depends on the peak to rms ratio of the selected waveform Fora sinewave the maximum voltage that can be programmed is 300 V rms Note You cannot program a voltage that produces a higher volt second on the output than a 300V rms sinewave Command Syntax SOURce LIST VOLTage LEVel lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 300 for sinewaves Unit V rms voltage Examples LIST VOLT 2 0 2 5 3 0 LIST VOLT MAX 2 5 MIN Query Syntax SOURce LIST VOL Tage L EVel Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands LIST VOLT POIN LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST STEP LIST SHAP LIST VOLT OFFS LIST VOLTage POINts This query returns the number of points specified in LIST VOLT Note that it returns only the total number of points not the point values Query Syntax SOURce LIST
170. event summary bit bit 3 of the Status Byte Register OPERation selects the Operation Event summary bit bit 7 of the Status Byte Register ESB selects the Standard Event summary bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register RQS selects the Request Service bit bit 6 of the Status Byte Register OFF selects no DFI source To enable or disable the DFI output use OUTPut DFI STATe ON OFF 160 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 7 9 SCPI Command Completion SCPI commands sent to the AC source are processed either sequentially or in parallel Sequential commands finish execution before a subsequent command begins Parallel commands allow other commands to begin executing while the parallel command is still executing Commands that affect list and trigger actions are among the parallel commands The WAI OPC and OPC common commands provide different ways of indicating when all transmitted commands including any parallel ones have completed their operations The syntax and parameters for these commands are described in chapter 4 Some practical considerations for using these commands are as follows WAI This prevents the AC source from processing subsequent commands until all pending operations are completed This places 1 the Output Queue when all pending operations have completed Because it requires your program to read the returned value before executing the next program statement OPC can be used t
171. evious experience programming with SCPI e Controller programming manuals consult the documentation supplied with the IEEE 488 controller or IEEE 488 PC plug in card for information concerning general IEEE 488 2 conventions and concepts Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il The following are two formal documents concerning the IEEE 488 interface ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation Defines the technical details of the IEEE 488 interface While much of the information is beyond the need of most programmers it can serve to clarify terms used in this manual and in related documents ANSI IEEE Std 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands Recommended as a reference only if you intend to do fairly sophisticated programming Helpful for finding precise definitions of certain types of SCPI message formats data types or common commands The above two documents are available from the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York NY 10017 USA or via the web at www ieee org 1 2 Lx Series and Ls Series Differences The Lx Series and Ls Series of AC power sources are both based on the same AC power source hardware platform and share many common components The differences are primarily in configuration and options This manual covers both model series Some commands listed may not apply to Ls Series AC sourc
172. ey 196 DO160 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient 195 DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MAXimum 194 DO160 ABNormal VOLTage MlNimum 194 DO160 ABNormal VOLTage OVER 194 DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNBalance 194 DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNDer 194 DO160 EMERgency VOLT FREQ MAXimum RP 193 DO160 EMERgency VOLT FREQ MINimum 193 DO160 EMERgency VOLTage UNBalance 193 DO160 GROup 195 DO160 NORMal FREQuency MODulation 191 DO160 NORMaI FREQuency TRANsient 191 DO160 NORMaI FREQuency VARiation 192 DO160 NORMal VOLT FREQ MAXimum 190 DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ MINimum 190 DO160 NORMalI VOLTage INTerrupt 191 DO160 NORMalI VOLTage MODulation 190 DO160 NORMalI VOLTage SURGe 191 DO160 NORMalI VOLTage UNBalance 190 DO160 NORMaI W AVeform DISTortion 190 160 5 195 Ethernet tasse E E 29 Ext 66 FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe 47 FETCh ARRay CURRent HARMonic 47 FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic P IASC 48 FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic dee e Ta te env do ag ec 48 FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTTal 47 FETC
173. f the phase A waveform where the change will occur The following example will drop the phase A waveform at 90 degrees for 0 017 seconds before going to 115 volts PHZA 90 DLY 017 VAL 115 The following example will increase the phase A output voltage to 135 volts for 0 017 seconds starting at the 90 degree point of the waveform The voltage will return to 115 volts after the tran sient PHZA 90 AMPA 135 DLY 017 VAL 115 To program Current Limit CRL The CRL header with the optional A B or C extension is used to identify the Current Limit Command The argument is a numeric data field from 0 0 to the maximum rated current of the power system The following string will program a current limit of 10 5 amps for all three phases CRL 10 5 To program Calibration CAL The CAL header when used alone or followed by the header AMP in addition to an A B or C extension is used to calibrate the programmed output voltage The argument is a relative starting coefficient from 0 to 255 or the ASCII symbol The CAL ramp is not supported on the Ls Series The CAL header can be used with a Delay DLY command to allow the external calibration AC DVM time to settle A CAL coefficient can be programmed without a ramp by using only the argument with the CAL header To program the CAL A coefficient to 55 use the following string 55 The CAL header is used with the headers VLT CUR and PWR to calibrate the respective measurement functi
174. fore switching the voltage range relays when performing a voltage range change VOLT RANG command or front panel RANGE change The default delay is set to 0 1 or 100 msec This delay can be set to a value from 0 000 to 1 000 seconds Once set it is recalled at power up Note that this delay affects the time it takes to execute the OUTP 0 and the VOLT RANG commands If a delay is set the bus will be held by this amount of time while the power source executes either of these commands Note that this delay time is approximate only and may vary somewhat from unit to unit Command Syntax PONSetup RELay HOLD Parameters 0 000 through 1 000 Examples PONS REL 0 2 Query Syntax PONS REL Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands OUTP 1 VOLT RANG 68 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 15 Sense Subsystem Sweep This subsystem controls the measurement current range and the data acquire sequence of the AC source Subsystem Syntax SENSe COUPle DC ADC coupling mode SWEep OFFSet Define trigger delay in time relative to start of the digitizer data record POINtS lt n gt Define trigger points relative to the start of the digitizer data record TINTerval lt n gt Sets the digitizer sample spacing SENSe COUPIe This command sets the coupling mode for the ADC of the measurement system Available coupling modes are AC or DC Factory default is DC coupled This command requires firmware revision 0 95 or higher
175. front panel to display the measurement screen This is due to the different measurement screen layout and organization of the Ls series controller versus the L series controller 6 Unlike the California Instruments L Series controllers sending a CFGA XXX command to the Ls Controller will not cause the GPIB listen address to be changed immediately Instead a power cycle is required for the new GPIB listen address to take effect Thus it is not recommended to change the GPIB listen address as part of any application program on the Ls Series 7 The following APE commands are not supported due to hardware incompatibilities of the Ls Controller with the L series controllers CRL STP and PHZ STP No support for current and phase angle ramps CAL AMP STP No support for calibration ramp CAL PWR There is no power calibration requirement on the Ls TLK MNU Menus are different on Ls Series CLMB and CLMC Query format only 8 The following APE commands must be at the end of a compound command string or used as the only command in a message string SNC WVF CLK If followed by any other APE command in the same message string a syntax error will be generated 9 The MOD command cannot be used with other APE commands in the same message string 164 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II Configuration Issues The following configuration related issues are unique to the Ls Series when operated in APE mode and did not apply to the L Seri
176. g Manual Lx Ls Series Il The STP header is used to identify a numeric value as the increment or decrement value for a FRQ CRL AMP PHZ or CAL ramp The following example will ramp all outputs from 130 volts in 1 5 volt 5 sec steps to 10 volts AMP130 DLY 5 STP1 5 VAL10 The header VAL is used to identify the following numeric argument as the final Value of a ramp or step If the VAL argument is larger than the initial value for the parameter to be ramped the ramp will increment with step size defined by STP and DLY With the VAL argument less than the initial value the ramp will decrement from the initial parameter A ramp or step operation can be started at anytime by the GPIB message Group Execute Trigger GET The operation will wait for the Group Execute Trigger when the TRG header is added to the string The following example will decrement the output amplitude of phase A only from 120 in 1 volt 2 sec steps to 100 volts after a Device Trigger AMP A 120 DLY 2 STP 1 VAL100 TRG The following example will simultaneously ramp the Frequency from 400 to 500 Hz at a rate of 0 1 Hz per second and the Amplitude from 5 volts in increments of 5 volts per step RNG270 AMP5 FRQ400 STP 1 DLY1 VAL500 STP 5 A GPIB Service Request will be generated at the end of a ramp if SRQ2 is included in the setup string The GPIB Group Execute Trigger can stop at a ramp operation anytime To program a Register REG The REG header is used to load the
177. ge includes any combination of voltage voltage offset or function shape that can occur during the transient CURRent LEVel and VOLTage RANGe Programming the current limit by itself to a value that is greater than the maximum allowed on the presently programmed voltage range causes an error If the commands VOLTage RANGe 300 CURRent 10 are sent an error will be generated because the CURRent command is requesting a current limit that is outside the maximum value allowed on that voltage range Programming the VOLTage RANGe by itself causes the programmed current limit to be set to the maximum for the given range if it had previously been higher than the maximum setting for the new range If the commands VOLTage RANGe 150 CURRent 10 VOLTage RANGe 300 130 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il are sent no error will be generated because the second VOLTage RANGe command automatically sets the programmed current limit to 5 which is the maximum value for the programmed voltage range Programming both the current and the voltage range in one program message unit can be done in any order and will not cause an error if the final combination specifies a valid current limit for the indicated range If the commands VOL Tage RANGe 300 CURRent 10 VOL Tage RANGe 150 are sent no error will be generated because the combined current limit and voltage range specified on the second line are within the output ratings of above models 6
178. generation of complex sequences of output changes with rapid precise timing and synchronized with internal or external signals Each subsystem command for which lists can be generated has an associated list of values that specify the output at each list step LIST COUNt determines how many times the AC source sequences through a list before that list is completed LIST DWELI specifies the time interval that each value point of a list is to remain in effect LIST STEP detemines if a trigger causes a list to advance only to its next point or to sequence through all of its points All active subsystems that have their modes set to LIST must have the same number of points up to 100 or an error is generated when the first list point is triggered The only exception is a list consisting of only one point Such a list is treated as if it had the same number of points as the other lists with all of the implied points having the same value as the one specified point All list point data is stored in nonvolatile memory MODE commands such as VOLTage MODE LIST are used to activate lists for specific functions See However the LIST DWELI command is active whenever any function is set to list mode Therefore LIST DWELI must always be set either to one point or to the same number of points as the active list Subsystem Syntax SOURce LIST COUNI n INFinity DWELI lt n gt lt n gt POINtS FREQuency LEVel lt n gt lt n gt
179. guage syntax program headers 2 171 Table 8 4 APE Language Arguments sss enne nennen nennen nennen nennen 173 Table 8 5 Example TALK responses for phase 179 Table 8 6 APE Status Byte Error 22 2 4 111 a 181 Table 8 7 ABLE to SCPI mode change 183 Table 8 8 ABLE languange synstax ABL option sese ennemis 186 Table 8 9 ABLE languange Serial Poll Status 187 Table 8 10 MS704 Steady state frequency by group 205 Table 8 11 SCPI error codes and 0 44 00000000 eene nennen nnn nennen 231 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 1 Introduction This instruction manual P N 7004 981 contains programming informationfor the Lx Series and Ls Series AC power sources The Series versions of the Lx and Ls Series are backward compatible with the Series models The Programming Manual for Series models is CI P N 7004 961 and is available for download at www programmablepower com Series models are different from the original Lx Ls Series in the following areas e Standard USB interface has been added Available 100Mbit Ethernet LAN interface has been added Option LAN
180. h ARRay CURRent sess 46 FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMonic 51 234 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series Il 50 52 FETCh CURRent ACDO 53 FETCh CURRent AMPLitude MAXimum 53 FETCh CURRent AMPLitude RESet 53 FETCh CURRent CREStfactor 53 FETCh CURRent HARMonic PHASe 54 FETCh CURRent HARMonic THD 54 FETCh CURRent HARMonic 54 FETCh CURRent NEUTral AC 55 FETCh CURRent NEUTral ACDC 55 FETCh CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe nM dE A 56 FETCh CURRent NEUTral HARMonic 55 FETCh CURRent NEUTrTral 55 FETCh CURRent esses 52 57 FETCh POWer AC APParent 58 FETCh POWer AC PFACtor 59 FETCh POWer AC REACtive 59 59 58 FETCh POWSr et eite 58 FETCh VOLTage AC 60
181. h a sequence that includes nominal line high line and low line a list may include the following values LIST VOL Tage 120 132 108 120 132 108 120 132 108 You can specify lists for more than one function For example to synchronize the previous voltage list with another list that varies the output frequency from nominal to high to low the lists may include the following values LIST VOLTage 120 132 108 120 132 108 120 132 108 LIST FREQuency 60 60 60 63 63 63 57 57 57 All lists must have the same number of data values or points or an error will occur when the transient system that starts the sequence is later initiated The exception is when a list has only one item or point In this case the single item list is treated as if it had the same number of points as the other lists with all values being equal to the one item For example LIST VOL Tage 110 120 130 FREQuency 60 is the same as LIST VOLTage 110 120 130 LIST FREQuency 60 60 60 3 Determine the time interval that the output remains at each level or point in the list before it advances to the next point The time is specified in seconds For example to specify five dwell intervals use LIST DWELI 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 The number of dwell points must equal the number of output points If a dwell list has only one value that value will be applied to all points in the output list 134 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 Determine the num
182. h the transient generator and the measurement trigger systems They cause the trigger system to make a transition from the Idle state to the Waiting for Trigger state If the trigger system is not in the Idle state the initiate commands are ignored INITiate SEQuence and INITiate NAME initiate the trigger systems to reference trigger sequences INITiate SEQuence references a trigger sequence by its number while INITiate NAME references a sequence by its name The correspondence between sequence names and numbers is um ld TRANsient Step pulse or list transient trigger sequence roue tion Command Syntax INITiate IMMediate SEQuence 1 3 INITiate IMMediate NAME lt name gt Parameters For INIT NAME TRANsient ACQuire Examples INIT SEQ1 INIT NAME ACQ Related Commands ABOR INIT CONT TRIG TRG INITiate CONTinuous SEQuence INITiate CONTinuous NAME These commands control the transient generator trigger system e lorONocontinuously initiates the transient trigger system e Oor OFF turns off continuous triggering In this state the trigger system must be initiated for each triggered event using INITiate SEQuence INITiate CONTinuous SEQuence references the transient trigger sequence by its number while INITiate CONTinuous NAME references it by its name Command Syntax INITiate CONTinuous SEQuence 1 bool INITiate CONTinuous NAME TRANSsient lt bool gt Parameters 0 1 OFFION RST Value OFF Examples INIT CO
183. hat arrive during a dwell delay are ignored AUTO causes the entire list to be output sequentially after the starting trigger paced by its dwell delays As each dwell delay elapses the next point is immediately output Command Syntax SOURce LIST STEP lt step gt Parameters ONCE AUTO RST Value AUTO Examples LIST STEP ONCE Query Syntax SOURce LIST STEP Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST TTLTrg This command sets the sequence of Trigger Out list points Each point which is set ON will cause a pulse to be output at Trigger Out when that list step is reached Those entries which are set OFF will not generate Trigger Out pulses The order in which the list points are given determines the sequence in which Trigger Out pulses will be output when a list transient is triggered Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied ABORT Command Syntax SOURce LIST TTLTrg lt bool gt lt bool gt Parameters 0 1 Examples LIST TTLT 1 0 1 LIST TTLT ON OFF ON Query Syntax LIST TTLT Returned Parameters 0 1 Related Commands LIST TTLT POIN LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST STEP OUTP TTLT STAT OUTP TTLT SOUR LIST TTLTrg POINts This query returns the number of points specified in LIST TTLT Note that it returns only the total number of points not the point values 83 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax SOURce LIST TTLTrg POINts R
184. he lt NL gt newline indicator Terminators are not part of the SCPI syntax 2 5 3 Headers Headers are instructions recognized by the AC source Headers which are sometimes known as keywords may be either in the long form or the short form Long Form The header is completely spelled out such as VOLTAGE STATUS and DELAY Short Form The header has only the first three or four letters such as VOLT STAT and DEL The SCPI interface is not sensitive to case It will recognize any case mixture such as TRIGGER Trigger TRIGger Short form headers result in faster program execution Header Convention In the command descriptions in chapter 3 of this manual headers are emphasized with boldface type The proper short form is shown in upper case letters such as DELay Header Separator If acommand has more than one header you must separate them with a colon VOLT PROT OUTPut RELay POLarity Optional Headers The use of some headers is optional Optional headers are shown in brackets such as OUTPut STATe ON As previously explained under The Effect of Optional Headers if you Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II combine two or more message units into a compound message you may need to enter the optional header 2 5 4 Query Indicator Following a header with a question mark turns it into a query VOLTage VOLTage PROTection If a query contains a parameter place the query indicator at the end of the last header
185. he actual number of bytes in this case is 16384 or 16Kbytes The output voltage and current are digitized whenever a measure command is given or whenever an acquire trigger occurs If digitization is caused by a measure command the time interval between samples is determined by the output frequency For frequencies greater than 45 Hz the time interval is 10 4 microseconds If digitization is caused by an acquire trigger the time interval is set by SENSe SWEep TINTerval and the position of the trigger relative to the beginning of the data buffer is determined by SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts This command has two optional parameters The first one may be used to specify the number of 256 data sample blocks to transfer Valid parameter values are from 1 through 16 The second parameter may be used to specify the offset in number of 256 data sample blocks from which to start the data transfer Valid offset values are from 0 thorugh 15 If both parameters are omitted all 16 blocks are transferred starting from offset O first block 49 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax MEASure ARRay VOLTage DC lt n gt lt n gt FETCh ARRay VOLTage DC lt n gt lt n gt Parameters Optional block and offset parameters lt n gt lt n gt Where the first value lt n gt is the number of 256 sample blocks to transfer and the second value lt n gt is the first block offset to start with Number of blocks is from 1 to 16 offset is f
186. he cursor is on the LANetwork entry provides access to the LAN interface setting screens listed below Displays the IP address setting This value can be changed by pressing the SET key and entering a new value from the keypad or using the Voltage and Frequency shuttles Use the numeric data pad or the voltage shuttle to enter each field To move between the four fields use the decimal point key on the keypad or the Frequency shuttle To set a fixed IP address press SET and enter the desired IP address To set the unit to DHCP mode press SET and enter all zeros 0 0 0 0 as the IP address and cycle power two times The obtained IP address will be displayed after the second power on For the DHCP setting to work however the unit MUST be connected to a network with a DHCP server Any change to this value will NOT take effect until after power on the unit has been cycled When changing mode from static IP to DHCP it is necessary to cycle power on the unit twice once to change mode and again to obtain and display a new IP address from the network Displays the network Media Acces Control address This value is fixed and cannot be changed The same MAC is normally printed on the model serial tag The MAC address is shown as six hexadecimal numbers separated by a colon e g 00 20 4A 9A 02 FD Note that the leading 0 is never visible due to the maximum number of LCD characters per line Gateway address setting A default gateway
187. he traditional implementation used on other California Instruments AC power sources This mode provides shorted test times but does not follow the test protocols that were published with revision F in 2004 This option uses SCPI command syntax prefix MIL704 and is covered in this chapter e Option 704F covers revisions A thorugh F and does follow the new test protocol guidelines published in 2004 The 704F option uses SCPI command syntax prefix MS704 and is covered in chapter 8 7 The ABORt command will terminate the test in progress at any time See the Lx Ls Series II User Manual P N 7004 980 for more details about the implementation of each 704 test step The 704 option as implemented on the Lx Ls Series only supports AC power applications DC mode is not available on the Lx Ls Series so no DC tests are provided in the 704 option Note that none of the MIL704 commands do accept parameters or have a query format except for the MIL704 VERSion command which accept a letter D E or F as a parameter and the MIL704 FREQ command The MIL704 VERSion command query response will return the letter D E or F based on the selection test standard version The MIL704 FREQuency command query response will return the nominal test frequency setting Programming Considerations Several of the MIL STD 704 test steps take considerable time to execute Refer to Lx Ls User Manual P N 7004 980 for approximate test times The OPC command may be used to se
188. he voltage levels required to generate a normal voltage source Refer to Section 8 1 4 1 under the heading titled VOLTAGE SURGE for details Command Syntax DO160 NORMalI VOLTage SURGe Parameters none Examples DO160 NORM VOLT SURG Query Syntax none DO160 NORMal FREQuency MODulation This command will cause output frequency modulation The level of modulation is the function of the rate of modulation Refer to Figure 8 5 in the User Manual The command parameter is the rate of modulation in Hz Command Syntax DO160 NORMal FREQuency MODulation lt NRf gt Parameters lt frequency gt Examples DO160 NORM FREQ MOD 0 1 Query Syntax DO160 NORM FREQ MOD Returned Parameters lt NR2 gt DO160 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient This command applies to Group 1 only for the the Eurocae standard Refer to Table 8 5 in the User Manual Command Syntax DO160 NORMal FREQuency TRANsient Parameters none Examples DO160 NORM FREQ TRAN Query Syntax none Returned Parameters none 190 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il DO160 NORMal FREQuency VARiation This command applies to Group 2 and 3 only for the Eurocae standard Refer to Table 8 6 in the User Manual Command Syntax DO160 NORMal FREQuency VARiation Parameters none Examples DO160 NORM FREQ VAR Query Syntax none Returned Parameters none 191 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 4 3 DO160 Emergency Test Commands DO160 EMERgency VOLT_FREQ MINimum This command will
189. his command turns the front panel display on and off It does not affect the annunciators In the off state the LCD display will be blank but the backlight will remain on Note that this state overrides the DISPLay MODE state as well so the display will be blanked regardless of the display mode setting Command Syntax DISPlay WINDow STAT lt bool gt Parameters 0 1 5 ON Examples DISP STAT 1 DISP STAT OFF Query Syntax DISPlay WINDow STAT Returned Parameters 0 1 Related Commands DISP MODE DISP TEXT DISPlay MODE This command sets the display to show either normal instrument functions or to show a text message Text messages are defined with DISPlay TEXT DATA Command Syntax DISPlay WINDow MODE mode Parameters NORMal TEXT RST Value NORMal Examples DISP MODE TEXT Query Syntax DISPlay WINDow MODE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands DISP DISP TEXT 40 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il DISPlay TEXT This command sets the character string that is displayed when the display mode is set to TEXT The argument is a quoted string limited to upper case alpha characters and numbers The display is capable of showing up to 32 characters divided over 2 lines of 16 characters each If the string exceeds the display capacity it will be truncated The display system does not perform automatic word wrap between the 2 lines of the LCD display The programming is responsible
190. ice dependent error EXE Execution error OPC Operation complete PON Power on QYE Query error Command Syntax ESE lt NRf gt Parameters 0 255 Power On Value See PSC Example ESE 129 Query Syntax ESE Returned Parameters cNR1 Register value Related Commands ESR PSC STB ESR This query reads the Standard Event Status Event register Reading the register clears it The bit configuration of this register is the same as the Standard Event Status Enable register see ESE See section 7 5 for a detailed explanation of this register 119 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax ESR Parameters None Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Register value Related Commands CLS ESE ESE OPC 5 3 IDN This query requests the AC source to identify itself It returns the data in four fields separated by commas Query Syntax IDN Returned Parameters lt AARD gt Field Information California Instruments Manufacturer 4500LX 6 to 8 digit model number nnnnn 5 character serial number or 0 lt R gt XX XX Revision levels of firmware CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS 4500LX 12435 0 1 5 44 This command causes the interface to set the OPC bit bit 0 of the Standard Event Status register when the AC source has completed all pending operations See ESE for the bit configuration of the Standard Event Status registers Pending operations are complete when e All commands sent befor
191. igure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Partial COMMANG Tree reca deed dca i eade b e ices 13 Command Message Structure sssssssssssssesseeeee enne enne rsen nnne en 16 Windows XP Device Manager USB 26 LxGui Interface Settings for use of USB port sss 27 Pinging AC Source LAN IP address sssssssssssssesesee eee nnne ens 32 Position of LAN RS232C selection jumper W2 on 7004 716 2 Range Relay board 33 Model of transient SyStem iet n eet ee bee ter i ee eee aree e alee et 132 Model of output trigger 136 Model of Measurement 142 Pre and Post Event TriQQering ccceccecceceessceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeceenseceseeneaaeeeesseaeeeensneeeseneaees 147 Status Register Model 2 2 1 xt tpe tae HERE SEDE ERN RER RAPERE SER ERU aaa AE SE 151 SMA Connector Trigger Model sssssssssseseseeeeeeene ener entere nnne nennen 159 Fig re 8 1 APE Command Tee eode VORE accede Sales ev rae di ron aea e aeo ar aen sepan 169 Table of Tables Table 2 1 Command parameters Suffixes and 18 3 1 LAN Setting SCreehs eonun ee pte idea evn ueste rad o a deoa x yide 31 Table 4 1 PULSe HOLD
192. information The advanced version not only covers test levels it also implements the recommended test sequences to use as outlined in the new revision F Mil Std document This implies that the test times are considerably longer than was the case before For abbreviated tests use the MIL704 command set documents in section 8 6 The ABORt command will terminate the test in progress at any time See the Lx Ls Series II User Manual P N 7004 980 for more details about the implementation of each 704 test step The 704 option as implemented on the Lx Ls Series only supports AC power applications DC mode is not available on the Lx Ls Series so no DC tests are provided in the 704 option Note that most of the MS704 commands do accept parameters or have a query format except where indicated in the table Command Parameters MS704 VERSion A B C D EorF MS704 GROup SAC SVF SXF TAC TVF MS704 FREQuency numeric value MS704 STEP SINGle or CONTinous MS704 TEST CONDition A letter form A to Z or AA to ZZ function of test Programming Considerations Several of the MIL STD 704 test steps take considerable time to execute Refer to Lx Ls User Manual P N 7004 980 for approximate test times The OPC command may be used to set the OPC bit in the Event Status Register upon command completion The Event Status Register OPC bit can be enabled through the appropriate enable register to generate an SRQ if GPIB is used A
193. ing service by the Serial Poll During the polling routine the instrument needing service will return a Status Byte STB greater than decimal 63 The Status Byte values for various faults are given in Table 8 6 Table 8 6 shows all of the possible error messages that can be generated by the AC Power System The equivalent error messages used in SCPI mode will be displayed on the front panel of the AC Power System Reported Message Cause LE E A O E 180 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Reported Message Cause 26 RNG RANGE ERROR RNG value greater than highest range 27 AMP RANGE ERROR AMP value greater than RNG value FRQ RANGE ERROR FRQ value is less than 45 or greater than 1000 HZ RANGE ERROR HZ value greater than 999 0 P EXT SYNC ERROR No external sync input or signal not between min and max frequency CPU MEMORY FAULT CPU failed power on self test DMA OVERFLOW ERROR Remote message greater than 256 bytes The response after SRQ2 is included in a setup string and the execution of the string or measurement is completed STAOR Table 8 6 APE Status Byte Error Codes 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 28 29 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 63 EA 63 4 181 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 2 16 End of String Delimiter The End of String EOS delimiter recognized by the Ls AC Power source in APE mode is
194. instantaneous output current of the neutral output terminal in amperes The output voltage and current are digitized whenever a measure command is given or whenever an acquisition trigger occurs The acquisition sampling time interval is set by 46 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II SENSe SWEep TINTerval and the position of the trigger relative to the beginning of the data buffer is determined by SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CURRent NEUTral DC FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTral DC Parameters None Examples MEAS ARR CURR NEUT FETC ARR CURR NEUT Returned Parameters 4096 NR3 values Related Commands INST NSEL SENS SWE MEASure ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic These queries return an array of harmonic amplitudes of output current of the neutral output terminal in rms amperes The first value returned is the dc component the second value is the fundamental frequency and so on up to the 50th harmonic Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as 0 Query Syntax MEASure ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic AMPLitude FETCh ARRay CURRent NEUTral HARMonic AMPLitude Parameters None Examples MEAS ARR CURR NEUT HARM FETC ARR CURR NEUT HARM
195. ion 49 146 detinet eben 93 VOLTage ALC SOURcCe 93 5 92 94 95 VOLTage RANGe 95 5 0 97 VOLTage SLEW 97 VOLTage SLEW MODE 98 VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered 98 94 Ww waveform data format modes 49 146 238
196. ion see section 8 5 is implemented through the LxGui Windows program only and there are SCPI commands for it Refer to the Avionics Software Manual CI P N 4994 971 for more information 8 4 1 Command Tree DO160 FREQ MINinum MAXimum VOLTage UNBalance WAVeform DISTortion VOLTage MODulation numeric INTerrupt numeric SURGe FREQency MODUulation numeric TRANSient VARiation VOLT FREQ MINimum MAXimum UNBalance ABNormal stage MINimum MAXimum UNDer OVER UNBalance FREQuency TRANSient STANdard GROup 188 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 4 2 00160 Normal Test Commands DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ MINimum This command will set the voltage and frequency to the minimum level for the normal operation Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ MINimum Parameters none Examples DO160 NORM VOLT_FREQ MIN Query Syntax none DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ MAXimum This command will set the voltage and frequency to the maximum level for the normal operation Command Syntax DO160 NORMal VOLT_FREQ MAXimum Parameters none Examples DO160 NORM VOLT_FREQ MAX Query Syntax none DO160 NORMal VOLTage UNBalance This command will unbalance the voltage level for each phase to the normal high and low operating voltage of each phase This test is valid only for three phase AC source Command Syntax DO160 NORMa
197. is a node a router on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network This feature requires firmware revision 1 40 higher If you upgraded from a lower firmware revision the LAN configuration has to be enabled to display this menu Contact customer service for information on enabled this screen 30 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il HostBits Port No LAN Default This value can be changed by pressing the SET key and entering a new value from the keypad or using the Voltage and Frequency shuttles Use the numeric data pad or the Voltage shuttle to enter each field To move between the four fields use the decimal point key on the keypad or the Frequency shuttle Any change to this value will NOT take effect until after power on the unit has been cycled Number of host bits as opposed to network bits in network mask A CIDR class C network uses 24 network bits and 8 host bits Class A 24 Class B 16 This value can be changed by pressing the SET key and entering a new value from the keypad Any change to this value will NOT take effect until after power on the unit has been cycled TCP remote port number This value must be set to 5025 SCPI to support the built in web page This value can be changed by pressing the SET key and entering a new value from the keypad Any change to this value will NOT take effect until after power on the unit has been cycled LAN
198. ity IANA for Automatic Private IP Addressing APIPA is 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 When setting up a private network you will have to log off and disconnect first from any network connection and re log in to Windows To check the PC s IP address you can run the ipconfig exe program from the command prompt The screen on a private network should look as follows Microsoft R Windows DOS C Copyright Microsoft Corp 1990 2001 C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix LP Addresse now ww Roue Ge ge vul g 254 0 208 Subnet Mask mo Wek eo ellen i uoo 2554 020 Default Gateway s 9o ow d Since there is no DCHP server present in a private network like this the power source has to be set to a static IP address To determine what IP address to use use the first 2 octets of the PC s IP address and set a unique value for the third and fourth octet as long as there are no conflicts with any other IP addresses other instruments on the same private network In this example 169 254 0 209 would work Note For private network configurations no Gateway address is required 0 0 0 0 3 3 4 Setting LAN Parameters There are two ways to set the required LAN information on the power source 1 Through Ethernet connection Use the GetAssignlPAddress exe Windows utility program that is distributed on the CIC496 CD ROM with every power so
199. kmanship within the applicable warranty period stated above then AMETEK may at its option repair or replace the Product or issue a credit note for the defective Product or provide the Buyer with replacement parts for the Product The Buyer will at its expense return the defective Product or parts thereof to AMETEK in accordance with the return procedure specified below AMETEK will at its expense deliver the repaired or replaced Product or parts to the Buyer Any warranty of AMETEK will not apply if the Buyer is in default under the Purchase Order Agreement or where the Product or any part thereof e is damaged by misuse accident negligence or failure to maintain the same as specified or required by AMETEK e is damaged by modifications alterations or attachments thereto which are not authorized by AMETEK e installed or operated contrary to the instructions of e is opened modified or disassembled any way without AMETEK s consent or e used in combination with items articles or materials not authorized by AMETEK The Buyer may not assert any claim that the Products are not in conformity with any warranty until the Buyer has made all payments to AMETEK provided for in the Purchase Order Agreement PRODUCT RETURN PROCEDURE 1 Request a Return Material Authorization RMA number from the repair facility must be done in the country in which it was purchased Inthe USA contact the AMETEK Repair Depar
200. l VOLTage UNBalance Parameters none Examples DO160 NORM VOLT UNB Query Syntax none DO160 NORMal WAVeform DISTortion This command will set the voltage distortion to 596 for the duration of the test Command Syntax DO160 NORMaI W AVeform DIS Tortion Parameters none Examples DO160 NORM WAV DIST Query Syntax none DO160 NORMal VOLTage MODulation This command will cause output voltage modulation The level of modulation is the function of the rate of modulation Refer to Figure 8 4 in the User Manual The command parameter is the rate of modulation in Hz Command Syntax DO160 NORMaI VOLTage MODulation lt NRf gt Parameters lt frequency gt Examples DO160 NORM VOLT MOD 20 Query Syntax DO160 NORM VOLT MOD Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt 189 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il DO160 NORMal VOLTage INTerrupt This command will cause output voltage interruption There are 15 different levels of interruption Refer to Figure 8 6 in the User Manual for characteristics of each level Test numbers 16 and 17 for all equipment that does not incorporate digital circuit Test numbers 21 to 26 correspond to Standard through VI for EUROCAE and RTCA2 See Figure 8 7 in User manual Command Syntax DO160 NORMalI VOLTage INTerrupt lt NRf gt Parameters test number Examples DO160 NORM VOLT INT 4 Query Syntax DO160 NORM VOLT INT Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt DO160 NORMal VOLTage SURGe This command will generate t
201. l of the associated power system the output will go to zero volts The ASCII string CLK INT will return the slave AC Power System to its programmed frequency To Trigger an operation TRG The TRG header has no argument When the TRG mnemonic is included in a setup string it will delay execution of the string until the bus controller sends the GPIB Device Trigger message The TRG header may also be used to trigger register operations by including the TRG header with the string used to recall a register The following example will delay execution of the program in register 1 until an IEEE 488 Device Trigger is received REC1 TRG The Trigger mode may also be enabled in the local mode by programming setup parameters without depressing the ENT key The setup values will then be programmed in the remote mode when the Device Trigger is received To program the output Waveform WVF Optional The header WVF with the optional A B or C extension is used to identify the following argument as the Sine Wave SNW or Square Wave SQW function of the Waveform The following example will program all outputs to the square wave function WVF SQW The following example will program only output B to the square wave function WVFB SQW To Open OPN and Close CLS the output relay The OPN and CLS headers open and close the output relays in the power source There is no argument associated with these headers When the OPN or CLS headers is received the
202. lXed The waveform shape is unaffected by a triggered output transient STEP The waveform shape is programmed to the value set by FUNCtion TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs 76 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il PULSe The waveform shape is changed to the value set by FUNCtion TRIGgered for a duration determined by the pulse commands LIST The waveform shape is controlled by the waveform shape list when a triggered transient occurs Command Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe MODE mode Parameters FIXed STEP PULSe LIST RST Value FIXed Examples FUNC MODE FIX Query Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe MODE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands FUNC FUNC TRIG FUNCtion TRIGgered This command selects the shape of the output voltage waveform when a triggered step or pulse transient occurs The parameters are SINusoid A sinewave is output SQUare A squarewave is output CSINusoid The output is a clipped sine waveform Both positive and negative peak amplitudes are clipped at a value determined by SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid waveform name The output shape is described by one of the user defined waveform tables The maximum peak voltage that the AC source can output is 425 V peak This includes any combination of voltage and function shape values Therefore the maximum value that can be programmed depends on the peak to rms ratio of the selected waveform For a sinewave the maximum voltage
203. lear A value of 0 designates the low range A value of 8 designates the high range The following example will program the default voltage range to the high range ALM A8 To program 1 or 3 Phase Mode MOD optional This command is valid only for Ls Series models with the 3 controller and the MODE option The MOD header with the required PHS extension is used to identify the mode command The argument is either a 1 or a 3 to specify the 1 phase or 3 phase mode respectively A mode change by the AC Power System will cause the output voltage to go to the default values The following string will set the AC Power Systems to the 3 phase mode MOD PHS 3 177 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 2 12 Examples APE Query Commands The TLK header will setup the AC Power System to talk data The TLK header will setup the AC Power System to report a programmed output parameter if the program header is the argument for the TLK header To setup the AC Power System to report a measured value attach a measurement header as the TLK argument The measurement headers are VLT CUR PWR APW and PWF with an A B or C extension and FQM with no extension Note Unlike the California Instruments L Series controllers sending a TLK XXX command to the Ls Controller will not cause the front panel to display the measurement screen This is due to the different measurement screen layout and organization of the Ls series controller versus the L series c
204. lication configuration HIGH VOLTAGES HAZARDOUS TO HUMAN SAFETY may be normally generated on the output terminals The customer user must ensure that the output power lines are labeled properly as to the safety hazards and that any inadvertent contact with hazardous voltages is eliminated Guard against risks of electrical shock during open cover checks by not touching any portion of the electrical circuits Even when power is off capacitors may retain an electrical charge Use safety glasses during open cover checks to avoid personal injury by any sudden component failure Neither AMETEK Programmable Power Inc San Diego California USA nor any of the subsidiary sales organizations can accept any responsibility for personnel material or inconsequential injury loss or damage that results from improper use of the equipment and accessories SAFETY SYMBOLS AN WARNING N CAUTION Risk of Electrical Shock Refer to Accompanying Documents Q Off Supply Direct Current DC b Standby Supply Alternating Current AC On Supply 3 Three Phase Alternating Current D Protective Conductor Terminal on Earth Ground Terminal E Fuse L Chassis Ground Product Family Lx Lx Series II Warranty Period One Year WARRANTY TERMS AMETEK Programmable Power Inc AMETEK provides this written warranty covering the Product stated above and if the Buyer discovers and notifies AMETEK in writing of any defect in material or wor
205. lking Implementation given in appendix A of the IEEE 488 2 standard is not implemented in the AC source Including Common Commands You can combine common commands with system commands in the same message Treat the common command as a message unit by separating it with a semicolon the message unit separator Common commands do not affect the active header path you may insert them anywhere in the message VOLTage TRIGger 7 5 INITialize TRG OUTPut OFF RCL 2 OUTPut ON Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 2 3 Using Queries Observe the following precautions with queries e Setup the proper number of variables for the returned data e Read back all the results of a query before sending another command to the AC source Otherwise a Query Interrupted error will occur and the unreturned data will be lost 2 4 Coupled Commands When commands are coupled it means that the value sent by one command is affected by the settings of the other commands The following commands are coupled in the AC source e the voltage and function shape commands the step pulse and list commands that control output voltages and function shapes e the pulse commands that program the width duty cycle period and the hold parameter e voltage range and current limit commands As explained later in chapter 4 the order in which data is sent by these coupled commands can be important when more than one parameter is changed 2 5 Structure SCPI Message
206. llow the QUES summary bit from the Status Byte register to generate RQS Use SRE 8 4 When you service the request read the event register to determine which Questionable Status Event register bits are set and clear the register for the next event Use STATus QUEStionable EVENt 157 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 7 7 3 Monitoring Both Phases of a Status Transition You can monitor a status signal for both its positive and negative transitions For example to generate RQS when the AC source either enters the CLrms rms current limit condition or leaves that condition program the Questionable Status PTR NTR filter as follows STATus QUEStionable PTR 4096 NTR 4096 STATus QUEStionable ENABle 4096 SRE 8 The PTR filter will cause the QUES summary bit to set RQS when CLrms occurs When the controller subsequently reads the event register with STATus QUEStionable EVEN the register is cleared When CLrms subsequently goes false the NTR filter causes the QUES summary bit to again set RQS 7 7 4 Programming the Trigger In and Trigger Out SMA connectors The AC source has two SMA connectors labeled Trigger 1 Trigger Out2 see Figure 7 2 Refer to specifications in the User s Manual for the electrical parameters Trigger In1 SMA This chassis referenced digital input can be selected as a source for transient or measurement triggers This allows an action to be synchronized to an external signal The trigger is r
207. lternatively the query commend can be used to poll for completion of the MIL704 command 202 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 7 1 Command Tree MS704 ABNormal LIMits ALL LOW HIGH TRANSient ALL OVER UNDer COMBination REPetitive FREQuency TRANSsient ALL OVER UNDer COMBination EMERgency LIMits ALL NOMinal LOW HIGH FREQuency GROUp NORMal SSLimits ALL NOMinal LOW HIGH UNBalance VOLTage PHASe DIFFerance MODulation DISTortion ALL OVER UNDer COMBination FREQuency MODulation TRANSient ALL OVER UNDer COMBination 203 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II POWer FAIL COMBination ALL ONE TWO THRee PHASE REVersal VERSion SKIP STATus STEP TEST CONDition TRANsfer POWer INTerrupt 204 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 7 2 MS704 General Commands A number of MS704 commands are available to define the revision mode of operation nominal frequency and EUT class to be used for the DO160 test These general commands should be set used to define the required test settings prior to calling any specific test step commands While most of the MS704 commands do not accept parameters or have a query format the general setup commands do as indicated in the table below Command Parameters MS704 REVision A
208. mand only applies Command not Do not use command to RS 232 interface relevant for GPIB interface 229 rogramming Manual Rev 5 Lx Ls Series II Trigger received before requested number of pre trigger readings Data acquisition pre trigger buffer not filled yet Requested RMS current too high for voltage range Max RMS current is function of voltage range selected Waveform data not defined VOLT VOLT SLEW and Conflict between FUNC SHAPe modes wave shape and incompatible programmed slew Measurement overrange Output buffer overrun Too much data in output buffer N Command cannot be given with present SYST CONF setting Command conflicts with available hardware or firmware option settings Output voltage does not match program value when ALC is on Over load Voltage kick back No output voltage Output volt fault Current limit exceeded Current limit fault Temperature fault Amplifier heat sink temp too high Hold off trigger or reduce pre trigger delay Reduce programmed RMS current limit or select low voltage range No waveform name Specify waveform name before specified sending waveform data Reduce slew or change waveform type Measurement data out of range Check receive mode on application program Program is not reading data sent by AC source Check configuration for available options and features
209. mentation The bit configuration is shown in Table 5 3 Command Action STB reads the data in the register but does not clear it returns MSS in bit 6 serial poll reads and clears the data in the register returns RQS in bit 6 The MSS Bit This is a real time unlatched summary of all Status Byte register bits that are enabled by the Service Request Enable register MSS is set whenever the AC source has one or more reasons for requesting service STB reads the MSS in bit position 6 of the response but does not clear any of the bits in the Status Byte register The RQS Bit The RQS bit is a latched version of the MSS bit Whenever the AC source requests service it sets the SRQ interrupt line true and latches RQS into bit 6 of the Status Byte register When the controller does a serial poll RQS is cleared inside the register and returned in bit position 6 of the response The remaining bits of the Status Byte register are not disturbed The MAV bit and Output Queue The Output Queue is a first in first out FIFO data register that stores AC source to controller messages until the controller reads them Whenever the queue holds one or more bytes it sets the MAV bit bit 4 of the Status byte register 156 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 7 7 Examples 7 7 1 Determining the Cause of a Service Interrupt You can determine the reason for an SRQ by the following actions 1 Determine which summary bits are active Use
210. message sent to the AC Power System must have the following format for each parameter HHHDXXX E NND Where H Three letter mnemonic for each message header D Optional header extension A B or C to specify output ref Table 8 3 X Alpha numeric or for message header argument E Optional ASCII E for exponent identification Exponent sign N Exponent value 0 to 63 D Message string delimiter CR LF or LF More than one message header with its corresponding argument may be sent in one setup string with a common delimiter 8 2 6 Numeric Data Field Parameter values may be sent as an unsigned value with a decimal point or a decimal point with an exponent The phase value may be sent as a signed value The Decimal Point for numeric data values may be either sent or inferred The two following ASCII strings will represent 115 volts AMP115 AMP115 0 There may be any number of digits following the decimal point not to exceed the 256 byte DAM buffer but only the Least Significant Digit LSD of resolution will be recognized The LSD for amplitude is 0 1 volts The LSD for frequency is either 0 01 0 1 or 1 Hz for up to 99 99 999 9 or 5000 Hz respectively Any parameter s numeric value may be of a mixed form with a decimal point and exponent The exponent may be a numeric with or without leading zeros up to a value of 63 The following ASCII strings will represent 115 volts AMP1 15E2 AMP1 15
211. ming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 7 Limit Subsystem These subsystem commands may be used to query the hardware limits capabilities of the AC power source These commands are protected and can only be used in query format Subsystem Syntax LIMit CURRent Current limit setting FREQuency HIGH Frequency limit high LOW Frequency limit low PHASe Phase mode VOLTage HIGH Voltage limit high voltage range LOW Voltage limit low voltage range LIMit CURRent Query form returns the configuration current limit This value determines the maximum current available from one amplifier in the low voltage range Note that this is not the same as the available current maximum current which is a function of voltage range and phase mode To query the maximum available RMS current use the CURR MAX command Query Syntax LIMit CURRent Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples LIM CURR Related Commands CURR LIMit FREQuency HIGH Query form returns the maximum available output frequency This value determines the maximum frequency available using a sinusoidal waveform Note that this is not the same as the available maximum frequency which is a function of the frequency harmonic content of the waveform To query the maximum available frequency use the FREQ MAX command Query Syntax LIMit FREQuency HIGH Returned Parameters cNR3 Examples LIM FREQ HIGH Related Commands LIM FREQ LOW LIMit FREQuency LOW Query form
212. mplitude PHASe Returns neutral current harmonic phase DC Returns the digitized instantaneous voltage HARMonic AMPLitude Returns amplitudes of the first 50 harmonics PHASe Returns phase angles of the first 50 harmonics MEASure ARRay CURRent FETCh ARRay CURRent Phase Selectable These queries return an array containing the instantaneous output current in amperes The data returned in arbitrary block data format as follows 5 lt block length n gt lt b0 gt lt b1 gt lt b2 gt lt b3 gt lt bn 3 gt lt bn 2 gt lt bn 1 gt lt bn gt where b0 b1 b2 b3 four hex bytes represent IEEE single precision floating number where bO is the most significant byte and b3 is the least significant byte The number of bytes returned is contained in the data block header which always starts with the pound character followed by single decimal character indicating the number of digits that make up the block length of the data Thus 516384 indicates that there are 5 digits that follow containing the number of bytes in the data block excluding the header and length information The actual number of bytes in this case is 16384 or 16Kbytes The output voltage and current are digitized whenever a measure command is given or whenever an acquisition trigger occurs The acquisition sampling time interval is set by SENSe SWEep TINTerval and the position of the trigger relative to the beginning of the data
213. mponents of both systems are the same but the transient trigger system has additional delay and phase synchronization features that the measurement trigger system does not have The following transient trigger sources can be selected IMMediate generates a trigger when the trigger system is initiated BUS selects IEEE 488 bus triggers EXTernal selects the external Trigger In1 SMA connector 6 7 1 SCPI Triggering Nomenclature In SCPI terms trigger systems are called sequences When more than one trigger system exists they are differentiated by naming them SEQuence1 SEQuencez2 etc In the AC source SEQuencel is the transient trigger system SEQuence2 is the phase synchronization trigger system and SEQuence3 is the measurement trigger system The AC source uses aliases with more descriptive names for these sequences These aliases can be used instead of the sequence forms Sequence Form Alias SEQuencet TRANsient SEQuence2 SYNChronize SEQuence3 ACQuire 135 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 6 7 2 Output Trigger System Model Figure 6 2 is a model of the output trigger system The rectangular boxes represent states The arrows show the transitions between states These are labeled with the input or event that causes the transition to occur 4 ABOR STATE 4 RST OFF RCL INIT IMM INITIATED STATE INIT CONT OR LIST NOT COMPLETE amp TRIGGE
214. n Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNDer Parameters none Examples DO160 ABN VOLT UND Query Syntax none DO160 ABNormal VOLTage OVER This command will set the voltage to the surge level for the abnormal operation Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage OVER Parameters none Examples DO160 ABN VOLT OVER Query Syntax none DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNBalance This test will change the output voltage for phase A and B to 134V and phase C to a voltage lower by a value specified by an offset This command applies only to test standard selection RTCA2 Refer to the User Manual for details Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal VOLTage UNBalance Parameters none Examples DO160 ABN VOLT UNB Query Syntax none 193 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il DO160 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient This command applies to Group 1 only for the EuroCAE standard Refer to the User Manual for details Command Syntax DO160 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient Parameters none Examples DO160 ABN FREQ TRAN Query Syntax none Returned Parameters none 8 4 5 DO160 Test Setup Commands DO160 STANdard This command will select the proper test standard The standard selection must be set prior to any test selection The RTCA2 selection includes the Change 2 notice to the DO160D test standard as it applies to section 16 The RTCA selection does not include the Change 2 updates The Airbus standard is the same as the EuroCAE 14D standard with the excep
215. n the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as O Query Syntax MEASure SCALar VOLTage HARMonic AMPLitude NRf FETCh SCALar VOLTage HARMonic AMPLitude lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 50 Examples MEAS VOLT HARM 3 FETC VOLT HARM 1 Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure VOLTage HARMonic PHASe FETCh VOLTage HARMonic PHASe Phase Selectable These queries return the phase angle of the Nth harmonic of output voltage referenced to the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component The parameter is the desired harmonic number Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc component A value of 1 returns the fundamental output frequency Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as O Query Syntax MEASure SCALar VOLTage HARMonic PHASe lt NRf gt FETCh SCALar VOLTage HARMonic PHASe lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 50 Examples MEAS VOLT HARM PHAS 3 FETC VOLT HARM PHAS 1 Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure VOLTage HARMonic THD FETCh VOLTage HARMonic THD Phase Selectable These queries return the percentage of total harmonic distortion and noise in the output voltage
216. nable PTR These commands allow the values of the Questionable NTR Negative Transition and PTR Positive Transition registers to be set or read These registers serve as polarity filters between the Questionable Enable and Questionable Event registers to cause the following actions e When bit of the Questionable NTR register is set to 1 then a 1 to 0 transition of the corresponding bit of the Questionable Condition register causes that bit in the Questionable Event register to be set e When a bit of the Questionable PTR register is set to 1 then a 0 to 1 transition of the corresponding bit in the Questionable Condition register causes that bit in the Questionable Event register to be set e If the same bits in both NTR and PTR registers are set to 1 then any transition of that bit at the Questionable Condition register sets the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register e If the same bits in both NTR and PTR registers are set to 0 then no transition of that bit at the Questionable Condition register can set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register Note Setting a bit in the PTR or NTR filter can of itself generate positive or negative events in the corresponding Questionable Event register 101 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax STATus QUEStionable NT Ransition lt NRf gt STATus QUEStionable PT Ransition lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 32727 Default Value 0 Examples STAT QUES NTR
217. nce Phase Angle An output transient normally occurs immediately when the trigger signal is received or after the delay has expired if a trigger delay has been set For some applications it is desirable that the transient is synchronized with a particular phase of the output waveform such as the zero crossing point or the positive peak To synchronize the start of a transient with a particular phase of the internal phase reference you must select PHASE as the trigger source Use TRIGger SEQuence2 SOURce PHASe TRIGger S YNChronize SOURce PHASe To select the desired phase use TRIGger SEQuence2 PHASe 90 or TRIGger S YNChronize PHASe 90 which specifies the 90 degree phase angle of the internal phase reference as the point where the transient begins To turn off transient phase synchronization use TRIGger S YNChronous SOURce IMMediate When IMMediate is selected the trigger system transitions through the Delaying and Wait for sync states and goes directly to the Output state This is the parameter selected at RST 6 7 7 Generating Triggers Providing that you have specified the appropriate trigger source you can generate triggers as follows Single Triggers sending one of the following over the IEEE 488 TRIGger IMMediate e TRG e agroup execute trigger By applying a signal with a high to low transition to the Trig In1 SMA connector Continuous Triggers sending the following commands over the IE
218. nd recalculates PERiod Sets DCYCle and WIDTh and recalculates PERiod a Sets DCYCle and PERiod and recalculates WIDTh Sets WIDTh If WIDTh lt PERiod sets the PERiod and recalculates DCYCle otherwise recalculates the PERiod and DCYCle Table 4 2 PULSe HOLD DCYCle parameters PULSe PERiod This command sets the period of a triggered output transient The command parameters are model dependent Command Syntax SOURce PULSe PERiod lt NRf gt Parameters 3 phase models 0 to 1 07533E6 MINimum MAXimum 1 phase models 0 to 4 30133E5 MINimum MAXimum Unit s seconds RST Value 0 03333 Examples PER 0 001 PER MIN Query Syntax SOURce PERiod Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands PULS COUN PULS DCYC PULS HOLD PULS WIDT PULSe WIDTh 89 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II This command sets the width of a transient output pulse The command parameters are model dependent Command Syntax SOURce PULSe WIDTh lt NRf gt Parameters 3 phase models 0 to 1 07533E6 MINimum MAXimum 1 phase models 0 to 4 30133E5 MINimum MAXimum Unit s seconds RST Value 0 01667 equals the period of a single 60 Hz cycle Examples PULS WIDT 0 001 PULS WIDT MIN Query Syntax SOURce PULSe WIDTh Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands PULS COUN PULS DCYC PULS HOLD PULS PER 90 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 22 Source Subsystem Voltage This subsystem programs the output
219. nd the data in comma delimited form to the power source controller The datapoints correspond to a single waveform period When selected for output the waveform register will be output at the programmed frequency Each register should be set up to conain a single period of the desired output waveform only It is important to ensure that the start and end point of the waveform data matches equal value If not a discontinuity will occur each time the register repeats at the output while selected 6 10 2 Download Sample The Visual Basic 6 code sample below provides a simple illustration on how to download a user defined waveform The data points are passed in a single dimension array sWaveformPoints of type Single single precision floating point Note User defined waveforms are retained in non volatile memory The process of writing to this memory takes a certain amount of time Allow a 500 msec delay between sending the last data value and sending the next bus command Sample code Global sWaveformPoints 1023 As Single Waveform datapoints base 0 Private Sub Download ByVal strWaveName As String ByVal iPoints As Integer _ ByRef sBuffer As Single This procedure transfers a block of Data from the PC to the AC Source The waveform name is passed as a parameter Dim i As Integer Dim strCmd As String On Error GoTo XFRArbError Define catalog entry user defined name max length is 12 char strCmd TRAC DEF Left
220. ne Examples MEAS POW AC PFAC FETC POW AC PFAC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure POWer AC TOTal FETCh POWer AC TOTal These queries return the total power being sourced at the output terminals of a three phase AC source Query Syntax MEASure SCALar POWer AC TOTal FETCh SCALar POWer AC TOTal Parameters None Examples MEAS POW AC TOT FETC POW AC TOT Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt 58 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 4 12 Voltage Measurement Subsystem This subsystem programs the voltage measurement capability of the Lx Ls Series Two measurement commands are available MEASure and FETCh MEASure triggers the acquisition of new measurement data before returning a reading FETCh returns a reading computed from previously acquired data Individual outputs of a three phase source are specified by the setting of INSTrument NSELect Subsystem Syntax MEASure FETCh SCALar DC Returns the dc component of the voltage AC Returns ac rms voltage Returns ac dc rms voltage HARMonic AMPLitude lt n gt Returns amplitude of the Nth harmonic of voltage PHASe lt n gt Returns phase of the Nth harmonic of voltage THD Returns of total harmonic distortion of voltage RMS FUND Sets THD calculation to either RMS or Fundamental mode MEASure VOLTage FETCh VOLTage Phase Selectable These queries return the dc component
221. ng Self test A T Current self test error No 2 B amplifier in Contact AMETEK service department output 2 Aux Source has no at service programmablepower com output during Self test AR Current self test error No 3 C amplifier in Contact AMETEK service department output 3 Aux Source has no at service programmablepower com output during Self test 216 RS 232 receiver Communication Check RS232 port settings and framing error failure cable 217 RS 232 receiver parity Communication Check RS232 port settings and error failure cable 218 RS 232 receiver Communication Check RS232 port settings and overrun error failure cable 402 CAL password is Calibration password Re enter correct password incorrect does not equal high voltage range value 403 CAL not enabled No password entered Enter correct CAL password for calibration Systems in mode list Transient lists have Check list settings and correct to have different list unequal lengths same no of data points lengths Requested voltage and Wave shape selected Reduce RMS or crest factor of wave waveform exceeds peak and RMS voltage shape voltage capability combine to exceed peak voltage capability Requested voltage and The selected wave The volt second product of he wave waveform exceeds shape exceeds form magnitude and time in the transformer volt second output transformer and half of wave form rating capability Com
222. nize PHASe These commands set the phase angle with respect to an internal phase reference at which PHASe SYNChronous SOURce becomes true The range is from 360 to 360 degrees Command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence2 PHASe lt NRf gt TRIGger SYNChronize PHASe lt NRf gt Parameters 360 to 360 RST Value 0 Examples TRIG SYNC PHAS 90 TRIG SEQ2 PHAS 180 Query Syntax TRIGger SEQuence2 PHASe TRIGger SYNChronize PHASe Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands ABOR TRIG DEL TRIG SYNC TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT TRG WAI TRIGger SEQuence3 TRIGger ACQuire When the trigger subsystem has been initiated these commands generate a measurement trigger regardless of the selected trigger source The measurement trigger causes the AC source to digitize the instantaneous output voltage and current for several output cycles and store the results in a buffer The FETCh commands return the requested calculation from this acquired data When the measurement completes the WTG bit in the Status Operation Condition register is cleared 116 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II Command Syntax TRIGger SEQuence3 IMMediate TRIGger ACQuire IMMediate Parameters None Examples TRIG ACQ TRIG SEQ3 IMM Related Commands ABOR TRIG SOUR TRIG DEL TRIG SYNC TRIG SYNC PHAS INIT TRG WAI TRIGger SEQuence3 SOURce TRIGger ACQuire SOURce These commands select the trigger source for a triggered measurement sequen
223. normal operation mode tests Command Syntax MS704 NORMalI SSLimits ALL Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM SSL Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal SSLimits NOMinal This command will run the steady state normal operation nominal voltage test Command Syntax MS704 NORMal SSLimits NOMinal Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM SSL NOM Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal SSLimits LOW This command will run the steady state normal operation low voltage test Command Syntax MS704 NORMal SSLimits LOW Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM SSL LOW Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal SSLimits HIGH This command will run the steady state normal operation high voltage test Command Syntax MS704 NORMal SSLimits HIGH Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM SSL HIGH Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal SSLimits UNBalance This command will run the steady state normal operation voltage unbalance test This test is only available in the 3 phase mode Command Syntax MS704 NORMal SSLimits UNBalance Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM SSL UNB Query Syntax none 208 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II MS704 NORMal VOLTage PHASe DIFFerence This command will run the steady state voltage phase difference test This test is only available in the 3 phase mode Command Syntax MS704 NORMalI VOLTage PHASe DIFFerence Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT PHAS DIFF Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal VOLTage MODulation This command
224. nt NEUTral ACDC 55 VE ASUTE CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe dat bes E E viata Wi ate 56 coe CURRent NEUTral HARMonic 55 MEASure CURRent NEUTral 55 52 MEASure FREQuengy 57 MEASure POWer AC APParent 58 MEASure POWer AC PFACtor 59 MEASure POWer AC REACtive 59 MEASure POWer AC TOTal 59 58 58 MEASure THDistortion MODE 56 62 60 MEASure VOLTage ACDC 60 MEASure VOLTage HARMonic PHASe 61 MEASure VOLTage HARMonic THD 61 MEASure VOLTage HARMonic 61 60 MIL704 ABNormal FREQuency OVER 202 MIL704 ABNormal FREQuency UNDer 201 MIL704 ABNormal VOLTage OVER 201 MIL704 ABNormal VOLTage UNDer 201 MIL704 EMERgency FREQuency 202 MIL704 EMERgency VOLTage 202 _704 198 MIL704 SSTate FREQuen
225. nts Once configured the instrument behaves transparently as either a single phase source or as a three phase source depending on the selected configuration 108 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax SYSTem CONFigure NOUTputs lt n gt Parameters 1or3 Examples SYSTem CONFigure NOUT 3 Query Syntax SYSTem CONFigure NOUT Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Related Commands CAL CURR SYSTem ETIMe This command will return the total number of accumulated hours minutes and seconds Command Syntax SYSTem ETIMe Parameters none Example SYST ETIM Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt SYSTem ERRor This query returns the next error number followed by its corresponding error message string from the remote programming error queue The queue is a FIFO first in first out buffer that stores errors as they occur As it is read each error is removed from the queue When all errors have been read the query returns 0 No Error If more errors are accumulated than the queue can hold the last error in the queue is 350 Too Many Errors Query Syntax SYSTem ERRor Parameters None Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt lt SRD gt Example SYST ERR SYSTem LANGuage Sets the command language of the AC Power Source to either SCPI or an available alternate programming language such as APE Abbreviated Plain English The language selection is stored in non volatile memory and is retained after power off Bo
226. nts The frequency points are given in the command parameters which are separated by commas The order in which the points are entered determines the sequence in which they are output when a list is triggered Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied 80 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax SOURce LIST FREQuency LEVel lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Parameters 45 to 5000 Unit HZ Hertz Examples LIST FREQ 60 65 70 Query Syntax SOURce LIST FREQ Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands LIST FREQ POIN LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST STEP LIST FREQ SLEW LIST FREQuency POINts This query returns the number of points specified in LIST FREQuency Note that it returns only the total number of points not the point values Query Syntax SOURce LIST FREQ LEVel POINts Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Example LIST FREQ POIN Related Commands LIST FREQ LIST FREQuency SLEW This command sets the sequence of frequency slew list points The frequency points are given in the command parameters which are separated by commas The order in which the points are entered determines the sequence in which they are output when a list is triggered Changing list data while a subsystem is in list mode generates an implied ABORT Command Syntax SOURce LIST FREQuency SLEW lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 9 9E31 INFinity Unit HZ Hertz per second Examples LIST F
227. numerical or character string 2 6 1 Numerical Data Formats Symbol Data Form Talking Formats lt NR1 gt lt NR2 gt NR3 lt Bool gt Digits with an implied decimal point assumed at the right of the least significant digit Examples 273 Digits with an explicit decimal point Example 0273 Digits with an explicit decimal point and an exponent Example 2 73E 2 Boolean Data Example 0 1or ON OFF Listening Formats lt Nrf gt lt Nrf gt lt Bool gt 2 6 2 Character Data Extended format that includes lt NR1 gt lt 2 gt lt NR3 gt Examples 273 273 2 73E2 Expanded decimal format that includes lt Nrf gt and MIN MAX Examples 273 273 2 73E2 MAX MIN and MAX are the minimum and maximum limit values that are implicit in the range specification for the parameter Boolean Data Example 0 1 MS milisecond milam Common Multipliers K Table 2 1 Command parameters Suffixes and Multipliers Character strings returned by query statements may take either of the following forms depending on the length of the returned string lt CRD gt lt AARD gt Character Response Data Permits the return of character strings Arbitrary ASCII Response Data Permits the return of undelimited 7 bit ASCII This data type has an implied message terminator Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il lt SRD gt String Response Data Returns string parameters enclosed in double qu
228. o cause the controller to wait for commands to complete before proceeding with its program OPC This sets the OPC status bit when all pending operations have completed Since your program can read this status bit on an interrupt basis OPC allows subsequent commands to be executed 161 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 Option Commands 8 1 Introduction The Lx and Ls Series offer a number of options that are implemented in the power source controller If one or more of these options are installed they may be used from both the front panel and the interface For front panel operation of any of these firmware options consult the User Manual supplied with the unit For use in an automated test system this chapter contains the command sub system syntax for the available test options Specifically the following firmware options are available at the time of this manual s printing e RTCA DO 160D Option 160 e MIL STD 704 Option 704 e MIL STD 704F Option 704 e Abbreviated Plain English Option Bundled with GPIB option The AC power source will report all installed options including any firmware options when queried using the SYST CONF BYTE or OPT command Additional firmware options may be added over time Consult the factory for additional information on firmware options not listed here but present on your unit 1 Option 160 requires Lx Ls firmware version 0 88 or higher O
229. oltage slew rate is controlled during a triggered output transient The choices are FIXed The slew rate is unaffected by a triggered output transient STEP The slew rate is programmed to the value set by VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs PULSe The slew rate is changed to the value set by VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered for a duration determined by the pulse commands LIST The slew rate is controlled by the voltage slew list when a triggered transient occurs Command Syntax SOURce VOL Tage SLEW MODE mode Parameters FIXed STEP PULSe LIST RST Value FIX Examples VOLT SLEW MODE LIST VOLT SLEW MODE FIX Query Syntax SOURce VOL Tage SLEW MODE Returned Parameters CRD Related Commands VOLT SLEW TRG VOLT SLEW VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered Phase Selectable This command selects the slew rate that will be set during a triggered step or pulse transient A parameter of MAXimum or INFinity will set the slew to its maximum possible rate The SCPI representation for infinity is 9 9E37 Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered lt NRf gt INFinity Parameters 1E 3 to 9 9E37 INFinity MINimum MAXimum Unit V S volts per second 5 Value INFinity Examples VOLT SLEW TRIG 1 VOLT SLEW TRIG MAX VOLT SLEW TRIG INF Query Syntax SOURce VOLTage SLEW TRIGgered Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands VOLT SLEW MODE VOLT SLEW 97 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 23 Status Sub
230. on A Z AA ZZ will be run by itself This allows an individual test condition to be executed In continuous mode all remaining test conditions for the selected test will be run once the selected test condition is completed Thus in continuous mode the rest of the test will run from the selected test condition forward Command Syntax Parameters Examples Query Syntax Returned Parameters MS704 STEP SINGIe CONTinuous MS704 STEP SING MS704 STEP lt CRD gt 206 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il MS704 TEST CONDition This command sets the desired test conditions that apply to the EUT being test The operating condition for the EUT determines the severity of the immunity tests applied Available test conditions are defined by the letters A through Z or AA to ZZ Note that parameters AA to ZZ are only valid if the test group selected has more than 26 test conditions A Z For tests that show tests conditions starting at AA use A to select the first the first test condition not AA Command Syntax MS704 TEST CONDition Parameters A Z AA ZZ Examples MS704 TEST COND A Query Syntax MS704 TEST COND Returned Parameters CRD 207 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 7 3 MS704 Steady State Commands Steady state tests can be started by sending one of the MS704 NORM commands Available normal state commands are listed below MS704 NORMal SSLimits ALL This command will run all steady state
231. on An A B or C extension follows the headers to designate a specific measurement channel If the extension is omitted the calibration coefficients for all measurement channels will be the same and will depend on only the value for phase A The argument is a numeric value that represents the expected measured value It should be equal to an external precision TRMS voltmeter ammeter or power meter The following ASCII string will cause the current measurement for phase A to measure the value indicated by a TRMS ammeter standard 10 12 amps CAL CUR A 10 12 To program Ramp or Step operations DLY The DLY header is used with a parameter that has a numeric argument examples are AMP FRQ PHZ CRL or CAL in a single step program The numeric argument is in seconds with four decades of resolution from 0 001 to 9999 seconds The STP header with VAL may be used with DLY to completely specify a ramp program The following string will first step the voltage to 125 volts for 2 55 seconds and return to 115 volts AMP 125 DLY 2 55 VAL 115 The following string will ramp the voltage from 10 volts to 115 volts with 1 5 volt 5 sec steps AMP 10 DLY 5 STP 1 5 VAL 115 When an AMP header with an argument of 0 is used the waveform will stop and drop to zero volts at the point specified by the PHZ A value The following ASCII string will stop the waveform at 0 degrees for 01 seconds and return to 115 volts PHZ A 0 AMP 0 DLY 01 VAL 115 174 Programmin
232. ontroller The following string will setup the AC Power System to measure the phase A power output when it is talk addressed TLK PWRA All arguments for the TLK header are shown in Table 3 13 Table 3 14 shows an example response for all TLK arguments with no A B or C extension For 1 phase systems all responses will only include the phase A value For 3 phase systems if the TLK argument includes the A B or C extension the response message will be only for the indicated phase A GPIB Service Request SRQ will be generated at the completion of a measurement if the SRQ2 header is included with the TLK string The following string will cause the Service Request to be generated when the power system has finished the power factor measurement TLK PWF SRQ2 Example talk responses are shown in Table 8 5 Cd ewer 7 mmm SiS mem 2212 axe S 178 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Response Fields separate by SPACE 0x20 characiers Field B Field C PZMAO00 0 B242 1 C118 9 Contents of REGO RNG RNGA 135 0 VLT VLTA120 1 WVF WVFA SNW If function is not enabled a syntax Error message will be generated Table 8 5 Example TALK responses for 3 phase systems To query the measured Voltage TLK VLT VLT may be used as an argument to the header TLK with an A B or C extension When used as an argument it will set up the AC Power System to measure the output voltage with 0 1
233. ose calibration commands that exist on both units are listed in the table below iL HP6834B Lx Comment Equivalent CALibrate CURRent Error 113 Undefined Error MEAS N A Error 113 Undefined Error DATA n N A Error 113 Undefined Error IMPedance N A Error 113 Undefined Error LEVel lt level gt N A Error 113 Undefined Error PASSword n same Both units use same syntax but different impact Lx password is always the high voltage range limit value 232 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II iL HP6834B Lx Comment Equivalent iL HP password is default 0 no cal password needed This command can be used to change the cal password SAVE same Same STATE lt bool gt lt n gt N A Error 113 Undefined Error VOLTage AC N A Error 113 Undefined Error PROTection N A Error 113 Undefined Error Automated calibration software programs written for the iL HP Series will have to be modified to work with an Lx Series power source Diagnostic Subsystem The iL HP diagnostic subsystem is closely related to the old controller hardware There is no equivalent for most of the DIAGnostic commands on the Lx controller but no errors will be generated Instead the Lx will treat most of these commands as a NOP iL HP6834B Lx Comment Equivalent DIAGn
234. ostic CURRent Nop Returns empty response EEPRom n n n Nop NOP FAN MODE AUTO NOP Lx Fan speed is always in MANual AUTO mode SPEed AUTO N A Returns empty response SPEED MANUAL Nop NOP NOP 2 RESet Same See Lx Diagnostic subsystem Rwlongform n Nop NOP TEMPerature AMBient Same See Lx Diagnostic subsystem Display Subsystem The Display subsystem is supported on the Lx Series with firmware revision 1 20 or higher only Note that both units have different types of displays The iL HP has a 16 character single line display the Lx a 2x16 character line display Existing programs written for the HP model using the DISPLay subsystem will display all text on the first line only The Lx will accept both upper and low characters whereas the HP iL unit only accepts upper case characters Attempts to send DISPLay commands on Lx models with firmware revision less than 1 20 will result in Error 113 Undefined Header errors 233 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II Index 120 gcc RE 120 ESR 120 121 polos 121 OR TZEA ead 121 Wriclc DE 121 RO getto E dtd ee dts 122 PRO ites TM TRECE EE 123 CE 124 c seg 124 pour d E PES 124 ie te oo 125 clar 125 BU 126 A A350 option commands tette eet de 219 ABD option 219 AB OR
235. otes Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 3 System Considerations 3 1 This chapter addresses some system issues concerning setting up interfaces such as GPIB USB or Ethernet IEEE 488 GPIB Interface All Lx Series power sources are equipped with an industry standard IEEE 488 2 interface GPIB On Ls models the IEEE 488 2 interface is available as an option Option GPIB A GPIB controller such as a Windows PC with suitable GPIB controller card is required to use the GPIB interface 3 1 1 Assigning the IEEE 488 Address The AC source address cannot be set remotely It must be set from the front panel Once the address is set you can assign it inside programs The GPIB address can be set changed from the CONFIGURATION menu screen Press the MENU key and scroll to the CONFIGURATION menu using the Up Down arrow keys or press the MENU key repeatedly until the CONFIGURATION screen appears Press the ENTER key to enter the CONFIGURATION screen Scroll to the ADDRESS field using the Up Down arrow keys on the front panel The value of the ADDRESS can be set from 0 through 31 Avoid using address 0 as it is generally reserved for the GPIB bus controller Once set the GPIB address of the power source is retained in non volatile memory For systems using the National Instruments VISA or IVI drivers the address is specified in the resource descriptor GPIB 1 Consult you programmer s reference documentation on how to address a
236. ount of time as shown in the table below If you develop a test program that uses the RCL or SAV commands insert the amount of delay shown in the table before sending the next command in your program Command RCL 0 RCL n n 1 to 15 SAV 0 SAV n n 1 to 15 Execution time 20 msec 40 msec 80 msec 40 msec 121 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 5 8 RST This command resets the AC source to the factory defined states shown in Table 5 2 or to the setup contained in setup register zero if the pon state is set to REGO Which setting is recalled depends on the state of the PONS setting To change the selection use the OUTPut PON STATe command To determine the present setting use the query format Response is either RST or RCLO m o me _ CAL STAT OFF FIX 109 INIT CONT OFF SOUR PHAS 21 0 02 240 03 120 INST COUP ALL SOUR PHAS TRIG 01 05 2 240 03 120 INSTINSEL 1 OUTP OFF OUTP DFI OFF 5096 OUTP DFI SOUR OFF WIDT OUTP PROT DEL 100ms 1 OUTP REMODE OFF 0 01667s OUTP TTLT OFF 1 OUTP TTLT SOUR BOT 1 SENS SWE OFFS POIN FIX SENS SWE TINT 10 42 us or SOUR VOLT PROT MAX 31 25 us SENS WIND Rectangular SOUR VOLT RANG MAX SOUR CURR SOUR VOLT SENS SOUR INT available SOUR CURR PROT STAT OFF INF SOUR FREQ 60Hz FIX SOUR FREQ MODE FIX INF SOUR FREQ SLEW INF SOUR FREQ SLEW MODE
237. output voltage will be programmed to zero volts for 50 milliseconds before the output relays open or close 176 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il To program Drop Cycles DRP The DRP header is used to identify the Drop Command The argument is a numeric data field from 1 to 5 The following string will drop the output voltage for phase B for five complete cycles and start at 0 degree of the waveform Note that all drop phase angles are relative to Phase A PHZ A 120 DRP B To program the Default Frequency FLM A The default frequency is the output frequency after power up or after an IEEE 488 Device Clear The following example will program the default frequency to 400 Hz FLM A 400 To program the default Voltage INI A The default voltage is the output voltage after power up IEEE 488 Device Clear or an Amplitude fault The following example will program the default voltage to 5 volts INI A 5 NOTE The restrictions on setting initial voltage that applied to the L Series do not apply to the Ls Series so any voltage amplitude within the selected voltage range can be set at initialization To program the default Current Limit INI C The default current limit is the value after power up or IEEE 488 Device Clear The following example will program the default current limit to 10 amps INI C 10 To program the default Voltage Range ALM A The default voltage range is the voltage range after power up or IEEE 488 Device C
238. ption 704 requires Lx Ls firmware version 0 98 or higher Option 704F requires Lx Ls firmware version 1 00 or higher 8 Option APE requires Lx Ls firmware version 0 98 or higher Check CI website for firmware updates 162 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 2 8 2 1 APE Command Language Abbreviated Plain English The APE Abbreviated Plain English command language syntax is available as an option on the Ls Series only This option is not offered on Lx Series models The APE language provides backward compatibility with California Instruments L Series legacy products This option is bundled with the GPIB interface option on the Ls Series If present Ls Series units of similar power and voltage rating can be used to replace L Series in test systems running programs written using the APE syntax The presence of this option can be determined by using the or SYST CONF command queries Note that the Ls can always be operated SCPI mode as needed If the APE option is installed it can be switched to APE mode In APE mode the IEEE488 2 common commands such as IDN are still available but not SCPI commands This section of the manual covers the APE syntax Note that the SCPI command language is still available as well The Ls can be configured to power up in either mode of operation The procedure is as follows e From the front panel select the CONFIGURATION screen using the MENU key In the CONFIGURATION s
239. ral HARMonic PHASe lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 50 Examples MEAS CURR NEUT HARM PHAS 3 FETC CURR NEUT HARM PHAS 1 Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure THDistortion MODE This command sets the calculation method for THD measurements The distortion calculation is based on the H2 through H50 with the RMS voltage or current in the denominator Note that some definitions of THD use the fundamental component H1 of the voltage or as the denominator Lx Ls units with firmware revision 0 88 or higher can be programmed to use the fundamental component as the denominator instead of the RMS value This mode can only be programmed over the bus by sending the MEAS THD MODE FUND command At power up or after a reset command the mode will revert back to the RMS mode This mode setting is not saved in any of the set up registers Syntax MEASure THDistortion MODE Parameters RMSQuare FUNDamental Examples MEAS THD MODE FUND Query Syntax MEAS THD MODE Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands MEAS VOLT HARM THD MEAS CURR HARM THD 55 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 10 Frequency Measurement Subsystem This subsystem programs the frequency measurement capability of the Lx Ls Series Two measurement commands are available MEASure and FETCh MEASure triggers the acquisition of new measurement data before returning a reading FETCh returns a reading computed from previously acquired data
240. rating can be used to replace PIP controller units in test systems running programs written using the ABLE syntax The presence of this option can be determined by using the OPT or SYST CONF Command queries The presence of the ABLE option is indicated by the LANG option string in the response to this query If the ABL option is installed the power source can be switched from SCPI mode to ABLE mode In ABLE mode the IEEE488 2 common commands such as IDN Are still available but not SCPI commands This section of the manual covers the ABLE syntax Note that the SCPI command language is still available as well although not at the same time The power source can be configured to power up in either mode of operation The procedure is as follows e From the front panel select the CONFIGURATION screen using the MENU key In the CONFIGURATION screen select the LANG field This field can be toggled between SPCI ABLE or APE using the shuttle knob When operating over the bus send the following commands depending on the present mode of operation to switch between language modes Present Mode To change to other language mode send ABLE mode SCPI SCPI mode SYST LANG ABLE Table 8 7 ABLE to SCPI mode change commands 8 3 1 Introduction Remote programming through the IEEE 488 Interface GPIB consists of sending the unit address and the proper ASCII alphanumeric characters to identify the parameter and the numerical valu
241. re defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard to perform some common interface functions The 3000Lx and the 4500Lx respond to the required common commands that control status reporting synchronization and internal operations The 3000Lx and the 4500Lx also respond to optional common commands that control triggers power on conditions and stored operating parameters Common commands and queries are listed alphabetically If a command has a corresponding query that simply returns the data or status specified by the command then both command and query are included under the explanation for the command If a query does not have a corresponding command or is functionally different from the command then the query is listed separately The description for each common command or query specifies any status registers affected Refer to chapter 7 under Programming the Status and Event Registers which explains how to read specific register bits and use the information that they return Common Commands Syntax CLS ESE n ESE ESR IDN OPC OPC OPT PSC lt bool gt PSC RCL lt n gt RST SAV lt n gt SRE lt n gt SRE STB TRG TST WAI Clear status Standard event status enable Return standard event status enable Return event status register Return instrument identification Enable operation complete bit in ESR Return a 1 when operation complete Return option number Power on status clear state set reset Re
242. re is way to query more than one phase with a single command Directing queries to individual phases is done with INSTrument NSELect Command Syntax INSTrument COUPle coupling Parameters ALLINONE RST Value ALL Examples INST COUP ALL Query Syntax INSTrument COUPle Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands INST NSEL INSTrument NSELect INSTrument SELect These commands allow the selection of individual outputs in a three phase model for subsequent commands or queries Their operation is dependent on the setting of INSTrument COUPIe If INST COUP NONE is programmed then the phase selectable commands are sent only to the particular output phase set by INSTrument NSELect If INST COUP ALL is programmed then all commands are sent to all three output phases Note If the power source is in SINGLE phase mode or does not support 3 phase mode of operation an INST NSEL 2 or INST NSEL command will result in a 222 Data out of range error INSTrument NSELect selects the phase by its number while INSTrument SELect references it by name These commands also select which output phase returns data when a query is sent Command Syntax INSTrument NSELect lt NR1 gt INSTrument SELect output Parameters For INST NSEL 1 2 3 For INST SEL OUTPut1 OUTPut2 OUTPut3 RST Value 1 or OUTPut1 Examples INST NSEL 3 Query Syntax INSTrument NSELect Returned Parameters cNR1 Related Commands INST COUP 42 Program
243. register specified by the following numeric data with the preceding data The numeric value is from 0 to 15 The PRG header is identical to the REG header and is included to standardize other AC power controllers The following example will load a ramp program that will step the voltage from 10 to 115 volts with 1 volt 5 sec steps at 400 Hz into register 0 FRQ400 10 DLY 5 STP1 VAL115 REGO To recall a Register REC The REC header is used to recall previously loaded data from a register identified by the following register number 0 to 15 The following example recalls and outputs the parameters stored in register 0 by an example in previous paragraph RECO The following example recalls the parameters in register 0 and outputs the parameters after the IEEE 488 GET message RECO TRG The following is an example of register linking The voltage and frequency is maintained at 115 volts and 60 Hz for 5 seconds and then the program contained in register 0 is recalled and executed The program is stored in register 1 FRQ60 115 DLY5 VAL115 RECO REG1 The program is initiated by the following ASCII string REC1 To program Voltage Range RNG The RNG header is used to select a range The numeric value following the RNG header will also define the upper limit for the AMP value The RNG value will select the higher range if the value is greater than the lower range value defined by the ALM screen which is 135 for the standard voltag
244. rm shape is controlled by the phase list when a triggered transient occurs Command Syntax SOURce PHASe MODE mode Parameters FIXed STEP PULSe LIST RST Value FIX Examples PHAS MODE LIST PHAS MODE FIX Query Syntax SOURce PHASe MODE Returned Parameters CRD Related Commands PHAS TRIG PHAS PHASe TRIGgered 86 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Phase Selectable This command sets the output phase when a triggered step or pulse transient occurs The phase of the output voltage waveform is expressed relative to an internal reference The phase angle is programmed in degrees Positive phase angles are used to program the leading phase and negative phase angles are used to program the lagging phase The PHASe command is not influenced by INSTrument COUPle ALL It applies only to the current output phase selected by INSTrument NSELect Command Syntax SOURce PHASe TRIGgered lt NRf gt Parameters 360 through 360 RST Value triggered phase 1 0 triggered phase 2 120 triggered phase 3 240 Examples PHAS TRIG 120 PHASE MAX Query Syntax SOURce PHASe TRIGgered Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands PHAS MODE PHAS 87 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 21 Source Subsystem Pulse This subsystem controls the generation of output pulses The PULSe DCYCle PULSe HOLD PULSe PERiod and PULSe WIDTh commands are coupled which means that the values programmed by any on
245. rnal Sense terminals Phase A is the reference phase and will always be reported as 000 0 degrees unless the AC Power System is operating in the external sync mode 179 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 2 13 8 2 14 8 2 15 APE Message Separators complete message consists of a header and an argument Since more than one message be sent in a setup string message separators included in the string between the message will make it more readable to the human operator Three message separators are recognized the comma semicolon and a space Since these separators are ignored they may be dispersed throughout a setup string The following are two examples of ASCII strings with separators PHZA90 FRQ60 AMP1 15 CRL 90 FRQ50 AMP 120 Service Requests After power up the GPIB Service Request SRQ will be generated after any error example syntax output fault etc as long as the Ls Unit is in APE mode This SRQ output can be inhibited by the SRQ header followed by the single digit 0 The SRQ can be re enabled by the SRQ header followed by 1 Sending SRQ2 causes an SRQ to be generated after the execution of a setup string or when data is available after a measurement query The setup string can be of any type ramp calibration etc The following example disables the GPIB SRQ SRQO Serial Poll Status Byte Error Messages Once the bus controller has detected the SRQ it must determine the instrument need
246. ro The Host name is cleared The password is reset to admin The unit is set to DHCP or Auto IP Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DEFault Parameters none Example SYST COMM LAN DEF Query Syntax no query for this command Returned Parameters none SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DESCription This command will set the user description The description is limited to 24 characters 106 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DESCription lt SRD gt Parameters lt SRD gt Example SYST COMM LAN DESC EVAL UNIT Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN DESC Returned Parameters lt SRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GWADdress This command will set the LAN Gateway address The query format returns the Gateway address set To query the actual gateway address used by the LAN interface in case the IP address is not static but assigned by a DHCP server the NCON parameter Network Connection Setting must be added to the query The default value is 0 0 0 0 Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GWADddress lt NRF gt Parameters ddd ddd ddd ddd lt Gateway address gt Example SYST COMM LAN GWAD 255 255 255 0 Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN GWAD SYST COMM LAN GWAD NCON Returned Parameters lt CRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HBITs This command will set the number of host address bits The query format returns the number of bits set To query the actual number of bits used by the LAN interface in case the IP
247. rograms the trigger system to immediately execute the next list point 6 8 Making Measurements The AC source has the capability to return a number of current voltage and power measurements When the AC source is turned on it is continuously sampling the instantaneous output voltage and current for several output cycles and writing the results into a buffer The buffer holds 4096 voltage and current data points The AC source uses the data from the voltage and current buffer to calculate the requested measurement information Data in the voltage and current buffers is always re acquired for subsequent measurement requests There are two ways to make measurements e Use the MEASure commands to immediately start acquiring new voltage and current data and return measurement calculations from this data as soon as the buffer is full This is the easiest way to make measurements since it requires no explicit trigger programming e Use acquisition trigger to acquire the voltage and current data from the buffer Then use the FETCh commands to return calculations from the data that was retrieved by the acquisition trigger This method gives you the flexibility to synchronize the data acquisition with an external signal FETCh commands do not trigger the acquisition of new measurement data but they can be used to return many different calculations from the data that was retrieved by the acquisition trigger Making triggered measurements with the
248. rom 0 to 15 Examples MEAS ARR VOLT FETC ARR VOLT Returned Parameters 4096 or less NR3 values Related Commands INST NSEL SENS SWE MEASure ARRay VOLTage HARMonic FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMonic Phase Selectable These queries return an array of harmonic amplitudes of output voltage in rms volts The first value returned is the dc component the second value is the fundamental frequency and so on up to the 50th harmonic Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as 0 Query Syntax MEASure ARRay VOLTage HARMonic AMPLitude FETCh ARRay VOLTage HARMonic AMPLitude Parameters None Examples MEAS ARR VOLT HARM FETC ARR VOLT HARM Returned Parameters 51 NR3 values Related Commands INST NSEL 50 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 49 Current Measurement Subsystem This subsystem programs the current measurement capability of the 3000Lx and the 4500Lx Two measurement commands are available MEASure and FETCh MEASure triggers the acquisition of new measurement data before returning a reading FETCh returns a reading computed from previously acquired data Individual outputs of a three phase source are specified by the setting of INSTrument NSELect Subsystem Syntax MEASure FETCh
249. s 0 to 50 Examples MEAS CURR HARM 3 FETC CURR HARM 1 Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent HARMonic PHASe FETCh CURRent HARMonic PHASe Phase Selectable These queries return the phase angle of the Nth harmonic of output current referenced to the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component The parameter is the desired harmonic number Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc component A value of 1 returns the fundamental output frequency Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as 0 Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent HARMonic PHASe lt NRf gt FETCh SCALar CURRent HARMonic PHASe lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 50 Examples MEAS CURR HARM PHAS 3 FETC CURR HARM PHAS 1 Returned Parameters lt gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent HARMonic THD FETCh CURRent HARMonic THD Phase Selectable These queries return the percentage of total harmonic distortion and noise in the output current 53 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent HARMonic THD FETCh SCALar CURRent HARMonic THD Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR HARM THD FETC CURR HARM THD Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Relat
250. s XP PC refer to section 3 1 IEEE 488 GPIB Interface Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 1 4 2 USB Capabilities of the AC source All AC source functions are programmable over the USB interface The USB capabilities of the AC source are listed in Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Some capabilities support on the GPIB interface such as ATN GET and SRQ interrupts do not apply to the USB interface The USB interface operates internally at a fixed baudrate of 460800 baud but USB 2 0 burst transfer rates are supported To set up the USB interface on a Windows XP refer to section 3 2 USB Interface The USB interface may be used to install updated firmware for the Lx Ls controller if needed Firmware updates and a Flash Loader utility program and instructions are available from the AMETEK Programmable Power website for this purpose www programmablepower com Multiple USB connections to same PC The Windows driver used to interface to the power source s USB port emulates a serial com port This virtual com port driver is unable to reliable differentiate between multiple units however so the use of more than one AC power source connected to the same PC via USB is not recommended Use of the GPIB interface is recommended for these situations 1 4 3 LAN Capabilities of the AC source All AC source functions are programmable over the LAN Ethernet interface if the option is installed The LAN capabilities of the
251. s set to INFinity which means that frequency changes occur instantaneously The frequency slew rate applies to programmed changes in frequency while the unit is operating in fixed mode Frequency changes made by the step pulse and list transients are controlled by the same rules that apply to all other functions that are subject to transient control See Programming Transient Outputs 6 2 1 Waveform Shapes At RST the AC source supplies a sine waveform but other shapes can be selected There are built in tables for sine square and clipped sine waveforms In addition the user can define arbitrary waveshapes by creating a 1024 point table of amplitudes for a single cycle As shown in the following examples the FUNCtion SHAPe command selects the output waveform Square Waveform To select the square output waveform use FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare Clipped Waveform To select a clipped sine waveform use FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid To set the clipping level to 50 use FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid 50 The clipping level is the percentage of the peak amplitude at which clipping occurs The clipping level can also be specified in terms of the percent total harmonic distortion in the clipped sine waveform by adding a THD suffix to the command For example FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid 10 THD sets the clipping level so that the clipped sine has 10 distortion User Defined Waveform To create a user defined waveform use TRACe DEFine command to
252. s the fundamental output frequency Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as 0 54 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent NEUT ral HARMonic AMPLitude lt NRf gt FETCh SCALar CURRent NEUTral HARMonic AMPLitude lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 50 Examples MEAS CURR NEUT HARM FETC CURR NEUT HARM 1 Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe FETCh CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe These queries return the phase angle of the Nth harmonic of current in the neutral output terminal of a three phase referenced to the positive zero crossing of the fundamental component The parameter is the desired harmonic number Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc component A value of 1 returns the fundamental output frequency Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as 0 Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent NEUTral HARMonic PHASe lt NRf gt FETCh SCALar CURRent NEUT
253. se As Long Dim expo val As Variant Dim mant f As Single Dim c 3 As Long Must use 32 bit integers to allow for intermediate result of 24 bit shift Dim sign As Boolean Const MANT MAX amp H7FFFFF Const EXPO MAX 2 126 On Error GoTo FloatConvError If bAsciiMode Then Retrieve ASC values from eight hex byte input data sData UCase sData For i 0 To 3 c i 0 For 0 To 1 iChar AscB Mid sData i 2 j 1 1 48 If iChar gt 9 Then iChar iChar 7 c i c i 16 j iChar Next j Next i Else Retrieve ASC values from four byte input data Note Don t use ASCB or ASCW functions as results will differ based on character sets even on non DCBS Windows Retrieve ASC values from four byte input data For i 0 To 3 c i Asc Mid sData 1 1 Next i End If Get sign bit sign 0 And amp H80 amp H80 Get exponent value less sign bit expo c 0 And amp H7F 2 Pick up exponent sign If c 1 And amp H80 amp H80 Then expo expo Or 1 get data less exponent sign bit 1 c 1 And amp H7F mantisse c 1 amp H10000 c 2 amp H100 c 3 mant f mantisse MANT MAX Process exponent If expo lt gt 0 And expo lt gt amp HFF Then expo expo 127 mant f mant f 1 expo val 2 Abs expo 145 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II If expo gt 0 Then mant f If expo 0 Then mant f Else If mant f lt gt 0 Then If expo 0
254. second on the output than a 300V rms sinewave Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage LEVel TRIGgered AMPLitude lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 300 for sinewaves Unit V rms voltage RST Value 0 volt Examples VOLT TRIG 120 VOLT LEV TRIG 120 Query Syntax SOURce VOLTage LEVel TRIGgered AMPLitude Returned Parameters NR3 Ifthe TRIG level is not programmed the IMM level is returned Related Commands VOLT VOLT MODE FUNC SHAP VOLTage MODE Phase Selectable This command determines how the ac rms output voltage is controlled during a triggered output transient The choices are FIXed The voltage is unaffected by a triggered output transient STEP The voltage is programmed to the value set by VOLTage TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs PULSe The voltage is changed to the value set by VOLTage TRIGgered for a duration determined by the pulse commands LIST The voltage is controlled by the voltage list when a triggered transient occurs Command Syntax SOURce VOLTage MODE mode Parameters FIXed STEP PULSe LIST RST Value FIX Examples VOLT MODE LIST VOLT MODE FIX Query Syntax SOURce VOL Tage MODE Returned Parameters CRD Related Commands VOLT TRG VOLT 93 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II VOLTage PROTection Phase Selectable This command sets the overvoltage protection OVP level of the AC source If the peak output voltage exceeds the OVP level then the AC source output is disabled
255. serial poll clears RQS but not MSS When MSS is set it indicates that the AC source has one or more reasons for requesting service Be 7 6 5 1 L 5 20 123 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il res 7 9 1 5 8 20 Bwn a w Table 5 3 Bit Configuration of Status Byte Register OPER operation status MSS master status summary summary ESB event status byte RQS request for summary service QUES questionable status MAV message summary available Query Syntax STB Returned Parameters lt 1 gt Register binary value Related Commands SRE ESE ESR 5 12 TRG This command generates a trigger to any subsystem that has BUS selected as its source for example TRIG SOUR BUS The command has the same affect as the Group Execute Trigger GET command Command Syntax TRG Parameters None Related Commands ABOR INIT TRIG IMM 5 13 5 This query causes the AC Source to do a self test and report any errors The selftest will run until the first error is encountered and terminate The response to the query will either be the first error encountered or 0 is no error was found Selftest passed For a list of error messages refer to Appendix C Note The selftest should always be run in 3 phase mode on all Lx models and Ls models with the option If the selftest is run in single phase mode not all aspects of the Phase 2 B
256. solution decimal point 2or1 Defines the current measurement resolution decimal point m EE 0 to MAX CURRENT Programmed output current limit A B C 0 00 20 9 Output current 4500L 3P and 2750L 3P 0 0 to 100 0 All other models 0000 to 9999 Total accumulated hours H 00 to 59 Accumulated minutes M 00 to 59 Accumulated seconds S Default frequency Low frequency limit 5000 High frequency limit 1898 45 00 to 5000 Measured output frequency 45 00 to 5000 Programmed frequency 0000 to 005 0 Default voltage O to CRL Default current limit Standard values shown Values will be different for other ranges output power and options NOTE If the A B or C Extension is not sent with the argument all phases will be reported INT or EXT Programmed external sync mode INT or EXT Programmed waveform E 0 0 to 359 9 Programmed output phase angle A B C 0 to 2000 or Output watts 3000Ls to 6000Ls Output KW All other models 172 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 2 11 a ae PZM 0 to 359 9 Measured B and C output phase angle relative to A A is always 0 0 Oto 15 Contents of Reg Talk contents of register 0 to 270 0 Programmed range and limit Table 8 4 APE Language TLK Arguments Examples APE Programming Commands This section provides APE syntax examples and programming techniques These examples are provided for reference only and are shown in no specific order To program Amplitude
257. sources 1 Low voltage range 2 High voltage range Note Sending RNGO to a 3 phase AC unit will also result in the low voltage range being selected Although Cl units do not have a 67 5 V range if enough current is available from the AC source the 135V or 150V range can be used This will avoid errors being generated when running existing code Note that for this command to work the output relay must be open See OPN command RNGF lt gt Set the upper frequency limit where n is as follows 0 Up to 100Hz 1 Up to 1000Hz compact iX or up to 5000 Hz Lx Ls 2 Up to the frequency limit of the source For compact iX this is also 1000 Hz up to 5000 Hz Lx Ls CLS Close the output relay OPN Open the output relay LOCK Will disable the output voltage fault generated by the Automatic level control of the source also will disable the current limit fault UNLK Will enable the fault generated by the Automatic level control and will enable the current limit fault ZERO When this command is send with the Voltage or Frequency setting the change of Voltage or frequency will occur at the zero crossing of the wave form The command is only effective at the time is send 184 SYNTAX DESCRIPTION PEAK When this command is send with the Voltage or Frequency setting the change of Voltage or frequency will occur at the peak of the waveform The command is only effective a
258. sses of instruments 2 1 Conventions Used in This Manual Angle brackets Vertical bar Square Brackets Braces lt gt Items within angle brackets are parameter abbreviations For example lt NR1 gt indicates a specific form of numerical data Vertical bars separate alternative parameters For example NORM TEXT indicates that either TEXT or NORM can be used as a parameter Items within square brackets are optional The representation SOURce LIST means that SOURce may be omitted Braces indicate parameters that may be repeated zero or more times It is used especially for showing arrays The notation lt A gt lt B gt shows that parameter A must be entered while parameter B may be omitted or may be entered one or more times 2 2 The SCPI Commands and Messages 2 2 1 Types of SCPI Commands SCPI has two types of commands common and subsystem Common commands generally are not related to specific operation but to controlling overall AC source functions such as reset status and synchronization All common commands consist of a three letter mnemonic preceded by an asterisk RST IDN SRE 8 Subsystem commands perform specific AC source functions They are organized into an inverted tree structure with the root at the top Some are single commands while others are grouped within specific subsystems Refer to appendix A for the AC source SCPI tree structure 2 2 2 Types of SCPI M
259. strWaveName 12 Send gl iNIBrdId AC Adr s NLend Send data buffer strCmd TRAC DATA Left strWaveName 12 Assemble data buffer string command 148 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II For 1 0 to iPoints 1 strCmd strCmd FrmOut sBuffer i 0 0 Next i Send gl iNIBrdId AC Adr strCmd Nlend Insert 500 msec delay to allow update of Flash memory msec delay 500 Exit Sub Format 4 digits XFRArbError MsgBox Error Err vbOKOnly vbInformation PROGNAME End Sub 6 11 Command Processing Times Most commands are processed immediately after they are received in the order they have been received Some commands however take a long time to complete During this time the power source may not be able to accept additional commands This issue must be considered when developing application programs In situations like this time must be allowed through a time delay or by interfacing to other instruments in the test system while the power source is allowed to finish The OPC 1 and OPC Commands can be used to determine if a command has been completed However some commands will not accept the OPC Query either if the processor is busy In this case a delay must be allowed before the OPC Query or the next command is send The following table lists those commands and their required processing times for reference Command Processing Time Comment SAV n 100 msec Save settings and tr
260. system Commands This subsystem programs the Lx Ls Series status registers There are four groups of status registers Operation Questionable Questionable Instrument Summary and Standard Event The Standard Event group is programmed with Common commands The Operation Questionable and Instrument ISummary status groups each consist of the following five registers Refer to Chapter 7 for more information about the status registers Subsystem Syntax STATus PRESet Presets all enable and transition registers to power on OPERation EVENt Returns the value of the event register CONDition Returns the value of the condition register ENABlIe n Enables specific bits in the Event register NTRansition lt n gt Sets the Negative transition filter PTRansition lt n gt Sets the Positive transition filter QUEStionable EVENt Returns the value of the event register CONDition Returns the value of the condition register ENABle n Enables specific bits in the Event register NTRansitionen Sets the Negative transition filter PTRansition lt n gt Sets the Positive transition filter INSTrument 15 EVENt Returns the selected phase s event register value CONDition Returns the selected phase s condition register value ENABIe lt n gt Enables specific bits in the selected phase s Event register NTRansition lt n gt Sets the selected phase s Negative transition filter PTRansition lt n gt Sets the selected Phase s Positiv
261. t bool gt lt bool gt VOLTage LEVel lt n gt lt n gt POINts SLEW lt gt lt gt POINts PHASe IMMediate lt n gt MODE FIXed STEP PULSe LIST TRIGgered n PULSe COUNt n INFinity DCYCle lt n gt HOLD WIDTh DCYCle PERiod lt n gt WIDTh lt n gt VOLTage ALC STATe ON OFF REG SOURce INT EXT LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt n gt TRIGgered AMPLitude n SENSe SOURce INT EXT MODE STEP PULSe LIST PROTection LEVel lt n gt RANGe 150 300 SLEW IMMediate n INFinity MODE STEP PULSe LIST TRIGgered n INFinity STATus OPERation EVENt CONDition ENABle n NTRansition n PTRansition n PRESet QUEStionable EVENt CONDition ENABlIe n INSTrument SUMmary EVENt CONDition ENABlIe n NTRansition n PTRansition n NTRansition lt n gt PTRansition n SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess ADDRess GWADdress 5 PORT SERial BAUD PARity BITS SBITs CONFiguration NOUTputs lt n gt 221 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II ERRor LANGuage SCPI APEN REMote RWLOCK TEMPerature VERSion TRIGger TRANsient SEQuence1 MMediate SOURce BUS EXTernal IMMediate DELay lt n gt SYNChronize SEQuence2 SOURce PHASe IMMediate PHASe lt n gt ACQuire
262. t limit function The command to set this limit is CURRent n where n is the rms current limit in amperes If the load attempts to draw more current than the programmed limit the output voltage is reduced to keep the rms current within the limit Since the rms detection involves a filter time constant that is long compared to a single output cycle the response time of the rms current limit is not instantaneous When the output voltage is reduced its waveform is preserved the output waveform is attenuated not clipped The AC source can be programmed to turn off its output if the rms current limit is reached This protection feature is implemented with the CURRent PROTection STATe command as explained in chapter 3 The CURRent command is coupled with the VOLTage RANGe This means that the maximum current limit that can be programmed at a given time depends on the voltage range setting in which the unit is presently operating Refer to Coupled Commands for more information Coupled Commands This section describes how to avoid programming errors that may be caused because of the error checking done for coupled commands such as VOLTage LEVel and FUNCtion SHAPe Commands that are coupled to the VOLTage and SHAPe commands are the output transient commands that control step pulse and list generation When an output transient is initiated ready to receive a trigger the error checking that takes place for maximum peak output volta
263. t register clears it On the Lx Ls Series each signal that is fed into the Questionable Status Condition register is logically ORed from three corresponding status signals that originate from each phase 100 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable EVENt Parameters None Returned Parameters NR 1 Register Value Examples STAT QUES EVEN Related Commands 5 STAT QUES NTR STAT QUES PTR STATus QUEStionable CONDition This query returns the value of the Questionable Condition register That is a read only register which holds the real time unlatched questionable status of the AC source Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable CONDition Example STAT QUES COND Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Register value STATus QUEStionable ENABle This command sets or reads the value of the Questionable Enable register This register is a mask for enabling specific bits from the Questionable Event register to set the questionable summary QUES bit of the Status Byte register This bit bit 3 is the logical OR of all the Questionable Event register bits that are enabled by the Questionable Status Enable register Command Syntax STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 32727 Default Value 0 Examples STAT QUES ENAB 18 Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable ENABle Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Register value Related Commands STAT QUES EVEN STATus QUEStionable NTR STATus QUEStio
264. t the OPC bit in the Event Status Register upon command completion The Event Status Register OPC bit can be enabled through the appropriate enable register to generate an SRQ if GPIB is used Alternatively the OPC query commend can be used to poll for completion of the MIL704 command 8 6 1 Command Tree MIL 704 ABNormal UNDer OVER FREQuenocy UNDer OVER EMERgency FREQuenocy FREQuency 400Hz 60 Hz VFRequency SSTate LEVel MODulation UNBalance PHASe UNBalance WAVeform DISTortion 196 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il FREQuenoy LEVel MODulation TRANSsient LOW HIGH FREQuenocy LOW HIGH D E F 8 6 2 MIL704 General Commands MIL704 VERSion This command will select the required test standard version The version selection must be set prior to any test selection Available revsions are D Command Syntax Parameters Examples Query Syntax Returned Parameters MIL704 FREQuency This command will selec E and F MIL704 VERSion D E F MIL704 VERS E MIL704 VERS lt CRD gt ts the nominal test frequency For revisions D and E the only available setting is 400 Hz For revision F draft available settings are 60 Hz 400 Hz or variable frequency The nominal frequency selection must be set prior to any test execution Command Syntax Parameters Examples Query Synta
265. t the time is send OVER This command will be accepted but will not disable the error detection of frequency or voltage values that exceed the source limits DROP lt gt Will cause the output voltage to drop for the number of cycles specified The maximum number of cycles is 10 OFF Set the output voltage to zero at the zero crossing of the waveform Will return the Voltage to the original setting if the voltage is turned off by the OFF command Will return the Voltage to the original setting at the zero crossing of the waveform if the voltage was turned off by the OFF command ON2 Will return the Voltage to the original setting at the peak of the waveform if the voltage was turned off by the OFF command SYNCO Sets the clock mode to internal This command cannot be combined with other commands in a single message string SYNC1 Sets the AUXILIARY unit in a clock and lock system to external clock mode This command can only be send to the auxiliary unit in clock and lock system Units without the CLOCK option will generate an error This command cannot be combined with other commands in a single message string GAL Goto Alternate Language This command switched the power source interface back to SCPI mode This command can not be combined with other commands in a single message string Measurement commands for single phase units 9012 These commands can not be combined with other commands in a single message string TEST
266. tatus group These three register groups monitor the status signals of each individual phase of the three phase AC source To determine which phase of the AC source is currently selected use INSTrument NSELect To set or read the status registers of another phase first use INSTrument NSELect lt n gt where lt n gt is the phase number Then send the appropriate register commands Condition STAT QUES INST 1 A register that holds real time status of the circuits SUM COND being monitored It is a read only register PTR Filter STAT QUES INST I A positive transition filter that functions as described SUM PTR lt n gt under STAT QUES INST ISUM NTR PTR commands in chapter 4 It is a read write register NTR Filter STAT QUES INST I A negative transition filter that functions as described SUM NTR lt n gt under STAT QUES INST ISUM NTR PTR commands in chapter 4 It is a read write register Event STAT QUES INST I A register that latches any condition that is passed SUM EVEN through the PTR or NTR filters It is a read only register that is cleared when read Enable STAT QUES INST I A register that functions as a mask for enabling SUM ENAB n specific bits from the Event register It is a read write register Table 7 4 Questionable Instrument Isummary Status registers The outputs of the Questionable Instrument Isummary Status group are logically ORed into the Isum bit 13 of the Questionable Condition regist
267. terface encounters a root specifier Active Header Path In order to properly traverse the command tree you must understand the concept of the active header path When the AC source is turned on or under any of the other conditions listed above the active path is at the root That means the SCPI interface is ready to accept any command at the root level such as OUTPut or STATe If you enter OUTPut the active header path moves one colon to the right The interface is now ready to accept STATe COUPling DFI or PROTection as the next header You must include the colon because it is required between headers If you now enter PROTection the active path again moves one colon to the right The interface is now ready to accept either CLEar or DELay as the next header If you now enter CLEar you have reached the end of the command string The active header path remains at CLEar If you wished you could have entered CLEar DELay 20 and it would be accepted as a compound message consisting of 1 OUTPut PROTection CLEAr and Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 2 OUTPut PROTection DELay 20 The entire message would be OUTPut PROTection CLEar DELay 20 The message terminator after DELay 20 returns the path to the root The Effect of Optional Headers If a command includes optional headers the interface assumes they are there For example if you enter OUTPut OFF the interface recognizes it as OUTPut STATe OFF This returns th
268. th the command and query form can be given regardless of the current language Note APE is available on Ls models only Command Syntax SYSTem LANGuage lt language gt Parameters SCPI APEN Example SYST LANG SCPI Query Syntax SYSTem LANGuage Returned Parameters lt CRD gt SYSTem LOCal This command can only be used with the RS 232 interface It sets the interface in Local state which enables the front panel controls For GPIB use the Local bus message which controls the ATN control line Command Syntax SYSTem LOCal Parameters None Example SYST LOC Related Commands SYST REM SYST RWL SYSTem REMote This command can only be used with the RS 232 interface It sets the interface in the Remote state which disables all front panel controls except the Local key Pressing the Local key while in the Remote state returns the front panel to the Local state For GPIB use the Local bus message which controls the ATN control line 109 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax SYSTem REMotel Parameters None Example SYST REM Related Commands SYST LOC SYST RWL SYSTem RWLock This command can only be used with the RS 232 interface It locks out the Local key on the front panel The SYST LOC command must be used to unlock the front panel For GPIB use the Local Lockout bus message Command Syntax SYSTem RWLock Parameters None Example SYST RWL Related Commands SYST LOC SYSTem TEMPerature This command
269. that are associated with SCPI syntax errors and interface problems It also lists the device dependent errors Information inside the brackets is not part of the standard error message but is included for clarification Some error messages are maintained for back ward compatibility with Agilent HP 6834B models moemoe 100 Unable to complete Unit may be in a mode inconsistent requested operation with request 102 Syntax error Command syntax Misspelled or unsupported command incorrect 103 Invalid separator SCPI separator not See SCPI section of programming recognized manual Data type error Data type invaled Check command for supported data types 108 Parameter not allowed One or more Check programming manual for additional parameters correct number of parameters were received 109 Missing parameter Too few parameters Check programming manual for received for correct number of parameters requested operation 110 Command header error Command header Check syntax of command incorrect 111 Header separator error Invalid command Use semi colon to separate separator used command headers 112 Program mnemonic too Syntax error Check programming manual for long correct command syntax Undefined header Check programming manual for 226 Programming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II sic amma Message String Galea Remedy correct command syntax ee
270. that can be programmed is 300 V rms Note You cannot program a voltage that produces a higher volt second on the output than a 300V rms sinewave Command Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe T RIGgered lt shape gt Parameters SINusoid SQUare CSINusoid lt waveform_name gt RST Value SINusoid Examples FUNC TRIG SIN FUNC TRIG TABLE1 Query Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe TRIGgered Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands FUNC FUNC MODEVOLT FUNCtion CSINusoid This command sets the clipping level when a clipped sine output waveform is selected The clipping characteristics can be specified in two ways e The clipping level is expressed as a percentage of the peak amplitude at which clipping occurs The range is 1 33 to 100 These are the default units when the optional THD suffix is not sent The clipping level is expressed at the percentage of total harmonic distortion in the output voltage The range is 0 to 43 percent The optional THD suffix is sent to program in these units 77 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid lt NRf gt THD Parameters 1 33 to 100 0 to 43 THD RST Value 100 0 THD no clipping Examples FUNC CSIN 80 FUNC CSIN 10 THD Query Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands FUNC MODE 78 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 19 Source Subsystem List This subsystem controls the
271. that can be programmed is dependent on the peak to rms ratio crest factor of the selected waveform For a sine waveform the maximum ac voltage that can be programmed is 300 volts Note You cannot program a voltage that produces a higher volt second on the output than a 300V rms sinewave Because voltage commands are coupled with the waveform shape command changing voltages without changing the waveform shape or voltage offset may result in an error if the resulting peak voltage amplitude exceeds the maximum voltage rating of the AC source Refer to Coupled Commands for more information Voltage Ranges The Lx Ls Series has two voltage ranges that are controlled by a relay that switches taps on an output transformer The command that controls the range is VOLTage RANGe MIN 150 300 When the range is set to MIN or 150 the maximum rms voltage that can be programmed for a sine waveshape is 150 volts but it is only on this range that the maximum output current rating is available For other waveshapes the maximum programmable voltage may be different depending on the waveform s voltage crest factor peak to rms ratio On the Lx Series the VOLTage RANGe command is coupled with the CURRent command This means that the maximum current limit that can be programmed at a given time depends on the voltage range setting in which the unit is presently operating Refer to Coupled Commands for more information Frequency The
272. that holds real time status of the circuits being monitored It is a read only register A positive transition filter that functions as described under STAT QUES NTR PTR commands in chapter 4 It is a read write register A negative transition filter that functions as described under STAT QUES NTR PTR commands in chapter 4 It is a read write register A register that latches any condition that is passed through the PTR or NTR filters Itis a read only register that is cleared when read A register that functions as a mask for enabling specific bits from the Event register It is a read write register Table 7 3 Questionable Status registers The outputs of the Questionable Status group are logically ORed into the QUEStionable summary bit 3 of the Status Byte register Note If the AC source is in the three phase mode each signal that is fed into the Questionable Status Condition register is logically ORed from three corresponding status signals that originate from each phase Figure 7 1 illustrates this for the OV bit the same illustration also applies to the other bits in the Condition register 153 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 7 4 Questionable Instrument Isummary Status Group Although only one group of Questionable Instrument Isummary Status registers is shown in Figure 7 1 there are actually three identical register groups With the exception of bit 13 the register structure is the same as the Questionable S
273. the in phase component of power being sourced at the output terminals in watts Query Syntax MEASure SCALar POWer AC REAL FETCh SCALar POWer AC REAL Parameters None Examples MEAS POW AC FETC POW AC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure POWer AC APParent FETCh POWer AC APParent Phase Selectable These queries return the apparent power being sourced at the output terminals in volt amperes 57 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Query Syntax MEASure SCALar POWer AC APParent FETCh SCALar POWer AC APParent Parameters None Examples MEAS POW AC APP FETC POW AC APP Returned Parameters cNR3 Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure POWer AC REACtive FETCh POWer AC REACtive Phase Selectable These queries return the reactive power being sourced at the output terminals in volt amperes reactive Reactive power is computed as VAR sqrt square apparent power square real power Query Syntax MEASure SCALar POWer AC REACtive FETCh SCALar POWer AC REACtive Parameters None Examples MEAS POW AC REAC FETC POW AC REAC Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure POWer AC PFACtor FETCh POWer AC PFACtor Phase Selectable These queries return the output power factor The power factor is computed as pfactor real power apparent power Query Syntax MEASure SCALar POWer AC PFACtor FETCh SCALar POWer AC PFACtor Parameters No
274. tion ENABle This command and its query set and read the value of the Operation Enable register This register is a mask for enabling specific bits from the Operation Event register to set the operation summary bit OPER of the Status Byte register The operation summary bit is the logical OR of all enabled Operation Event register bits Command Syntax STATus OPERation ENABle lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 32727 Default Value 0 Examples STAT OPER ENAB 32 STAT OPER ENAB 1 Query Syntax STATus OPERation ENABle Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Register value Related Commands STAT OPER EVEN STATus OPERation NTR STATus OPERation PTR These commands set or read the value of the Operation NTR Negative Transition and PTR Positive Transition registers These registers serve as polarity filters between the Operation Enable and Operation Event registers to cause the following actions e When abit in the Operation NTR register is set to 1 then a 1 to 0 transition of the corresponding bit in the Operation Condition register causes that bit in the Operation Event register to be set e When a bit of the Operation PTR register is set to 1 then a O to 1 transition of the corresponding bit in the Operation Condition register causes that bit in the Operation Event register to be set 99 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II e If the same bits in both NTR PTR registers are set to 1 then any transition of that bit at the Operation Condi
275. tion of a transient will stop the transient as was the case on the L Series but any program values associated with the command will not be accepted Thus while sending AMP100 to an L Series during transient execution will result in the transient being aborted and the output voltage set to 100 V the Ls will only abort the transient program If it is required to set the voltage the AMP100 command should be replaced with an AMP command followed by an AMP100 command 2 Ramp transients will be slewed in a linear fashion rather than in discrete steps as defined by the STEP value Thus the Ls determines the required slew rate For example where an L Series will step the voltage every second by 10 Volt to go to 100 V in 10 seconds the Ls will ramp gradually from 0 to 100 V over a 10 second period using a 10V s slew rate 3 The Ls will hold the last error message in its error buffer until the STA query message is received Once the TLK STA has been received the error buffer is cleared 4 Achange of the waveform THD level will cause the output to go to zero momentarily However a change from zero THD to the previously set THD level will not affect the output This may require the required THD level to be set when using an Ls before applying power to a EUT On the L Series this temporary loss of output was not required 5 Unlike the California Instruments L Series controllers sending a TLK XXX command to the Ls Controller will not cause the
276. tion of nominal voltage modulation Command Syntax DO160 STANdard Parameters RTCA RTCA2 EURocae AlRBus Examples DO160 STAN RTCA Query Syntax DO160 STAN DO160 GROup This command is used to select equipment Group 1 2 or 3 for the EUROCAE standard or equipment Group ACF ANF or AWF for the RTCA2 standard Some test commands apply only to specific groups of equipment If a test is executed for a group to which it does not apply the command is ignored by the power source Note that in this case no error is generated The application program is responsible for selecting the relevant Standard Group and test Command Syntax DO160 GROup lt NR1 gt Parameters 1 2 3 AWF Examples DO160 GROup 2 Query Syntax DO160 GRO 194 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 5 RTCA DO160 Rev E Test Option Revison E of the RTCA DO160 AC power section test standard is implemented through the provided LxGui windows program and can be accessed if the 160 option As such there are no SCPI commands that apply to this revision See the 7004 980 Lx and Ls Series User Manual for operation information 195 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 6 MIL STD 704 Rev D F 704 The following are the remote commands available for the 704 test option There are two firmware options available for MIL STD 704 testing the 704 option and the 704F option e Option 704 covers revisions D through F and matches t
277. tion register sets the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register e If the same bits in both NTR and PTR registers are set to 0 then no transition of that bit at the Operation Condition register can set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register Note Setting a bit in the PTR or NTR filter can of itself generate positive or negative events in the corresponding Operation Event register Command Syntax STATus OPERation NTRansition lt NRf gt STATus OPERation PT Ransition lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 32727 Default Value 0 Examples STAT OPER NTR 32 STAT OPER PTR 1 Query Syntax STATus OPERation NTR STATus OPERation PTR Returned Parameters cNR1 Register value Related Commands STAT OPER ENAB Bit Position Bit Name not not Isum CL not not TO UNR not OCP OV used use d used rms used used ejes e Table 4 4 Bit Configuration of Questionable Registers OV over voltage protection has tripped OCP over current protection has tripped UNR output is unregulated TO over temperature protection has tripped RI remote inhibit is active Rail loss of input phase detected CL rms rms current limit is active Isum summary of Isum registers STATus QUEStionable This query returns the value of the Questionable Event register The Event register is a read only register which holds latches all events that are passed by the Questionable NTR and or PTR filter Reading the Questionable Even
278. tment prior to the return of the product to AMETEK for repair Telephone 800 733 5427 ext 2295 or ext 2463 toll free North America 858 450 0085 ext 2295 or ext 2463 direct e Outside the United States contact the nearest Authorized Service Center ASC A full listing can be found either through your local distributor or our website www programmablepower com by clicking Support and going to the Service Centers tab 2 When requesting an RMA have the following information ready Model number e Serial number e Description of the problem NOTE Unauthorized returns will not be accepted and will be returned at the shipper s expense NOTE A returned product found upon inspection by AMETEK to be in specification is subject to an evaluation fee and applicable freight charges Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Table of Contents 1 IMtPOGUCHION a 8 1 1 Documentation ccccececeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeee cage 8 1 2 Lx Series and Ls Series 9 1 3 Manual organization and 10 1 4 Introduction to Programming eee nene rre gen 10 2 Introduction to SCPI Race tes iet uident 12 2 1 Conventions Used in
279. tput is a clipped sine waveform Both positive and negative peak amplitudes are clipped at a value determined by the SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe CSINusoid setting lt waveform_name gt The output shape is described by one of the user defined waveform tables The maximum peak voltage that the AC source can output is 425 V peak This includes any combination of voltage and function shape values Therefore the maximum value that can be programmed depends on the peak to rms ratio of the selected waveform For a sinewave the maximum voltage that can be programmed is 300 V rms You cannot program a voltage that produces a higher volt second on the output than a 300V rms sinewave 82 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il Command Syntax SOURce LIST SHAPe lt shape gt lt shape gt Parameters SINusoid SQUare CSINusoid waveform name Examples LIST SHAP Query Syntax SOURce LIST SHAP Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands LIST SHAP POIN LIST COUN LIST DWEL LIST STEP LIST VOLT LIST SHAPe POINts This query returns the number of points specified in LIST SHAP Note that it returns only the total number of points not the point values Query Syntax SOURce LIST SHAPe POINts Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt Example LIST SHAP POIN Related Commands LIST SHAP LIST STEP This command specifies how the list sequencing responds to triggers ONCE causes the list to advance only one point after each trigger Triggers t
280. tput voltage or current use the following commands MEASure CURRent HARMonic THD MEASure VOL Tage HARMonic THD 140 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 6 8 4 Simultaneous Output Phase Measurements You can return simultaneous measurements from all output phases of the source in the three phase mode using the FETCh query Unlike MEASure queries FETCh queries do not trigger the acquisition of new data when they are executed First you must initiate the measurement trigger system and generate a measurement trigger as explained in the following section Triggering Measurements When the measurement data has been acquired by the voltage and current data buffers for each output phase use INSTrument NSELect to select each phase and FETCh to return the specified measurement data The following commands return rms voltage INSTrument NSELect 1 FETCh VOL Tage AC INSTrument NSELect 2 FETCh VOL Tage AC INSTrument NSELect 3 FETCh VOL Tage AC 6 8 5 Returning Voltage and Current Data From the Data Buffer The MEASure and FETCh queries can also return all 4096 data values of the instantaneous voltage and current buffers These are MEASure ARRay CURRent MEASure ARRay VOL Tage 6 8 6 Triggering Measurements You can use the data acquisition trigger system to synchronize the timing of the voltage and current data acquisition with an external trigger source Then use the FETCh commands to return different calculations from the data a
281. transients test Command Syntax MS704 ABNormal FREQuency TRANsient COMBination Parameters none Examples MS704 ABN FREQ TRAN COMB Query Syntax none 214 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 7 5 MS704 Emergency State Commands Emergency state tests can be started by sending one of the MS704 EMER commands Available emergency state commands are listed below MS704 EMERgency LIMit ALL This command will run all emergency state operation mode tests Command Syntax MS704 EMERgency LIMit ALL Parameters none Examples MS704 EMER LIM Query Syntax none MS704 EMERgency LIMit NOMinal This command will run the emergency state nominal operation mode tests Command Syntax MS704 EMERgency LIMit NOMinal Parameters none Examples MS704 EMER LIM NOM Query Syntax none MS704 EMERgency LIMit LOW This command will run the emergency state low operation mode tests Command Syntax MS704 EMERgency LIMit LOW Parameters none Examples MS704 EMER LIM LOW Query Syntax none MS704 EMERgency LIMit HIGH This command will run the emergency state high operation mode tests Command Syntax MS704 EMERgency LIMit HIGH Parameters none Examples MS704 EMER LIM HIGH Query Syntax none 215 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 8 7 6 MS704 Power Fail State Commands Power fail state tests can be started by sending one of the MS704 POW FAIL commands Available power fail state commands are listed below MS704 POWer FAIL
282. ts from being saved causing them to be cleared at power on This prevents a PON event from generating SRQ at power on PSC OFF 0 saves the contents of the Standard Event Enable and Service Request Enable registers in nonvolatile memory and recalls them at power on This allows a PON event to generate SRQ at power on Command Syntax PSC lt bool gt Parameters 0 1 PSCO 5 1 Query Syntax PSC Returned Parameters 0 1 Related Commands ESE SRE 57 Warning Recalling a previously stored state may place hazardous voltages at the AC source output This command restores the AC source to a state that was previously stored in memory with a command to the specified location All states are recalled with the following exceptions CAL STATe is set to OFF e the trigger system is set to the Idle state by an implied ABORt command this cancels any uncompleted trigger actions The device state stored in location 0 is automatically recalled at power turn on when the OUTPut PON STATE is set to RCLO This register only saves steady state setting not the transient list data All other registers 1 15 saved both the steady state settings and the transient list data record Command Syntax RCL lt NRf gt Parameters 0 through 15 Example RCL 3 Related Commands PSC HST SAV Note that recalling settings and transient list information from non volatile memory takes some am
283. turn power on status clear state Recall instrument state Reset Save instrument state Set service request enable register Return service request enable register Return status byte Trigger Perform selftest then return result Hold off bus until all device commands done 118 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 5 1 CLS This command clears the following registers see chapter 7 under Programming the Status and Event Registers for descriptions of all registers e Standard Event Status e Operation Status Event e Questionable Status Event e Status Byte e Error Queue Command Syntax CLS Parameters None ESE This command programs the Standard Event Status Enable register bits The programming determines which events of the Standard Event Status Event register see ESR are allowed to set the ESB Event Summary Bit of the Status Byte register A 1 in the bit position enables the corresponding event All of the enabled events of the Standard Event Status Event Register are logically ORed to cause the Event Summary Bit ESB of the Status Byte Register to be set See section 7 5 for descriptions of the Standard Event Status registers The query reads the Standard Event Status Enable register ee 5 Se Bwn e ef 35 fs 5 2 Table 5 1 Bit Configuration of Standard Event Status Enable Register CME Command error DDE Dev
284. ueries can return the amplitude and phase of up to the 50th harmonic of voltage and current They can also return the total harmonic distortion in the output voltage or current For example to return readings for an individual harmonic component use the following commands MEASure CURRent HARMonic AMPLitude harmonic number MEASure CURRent HARMonic PHASe harmonic number MEASure VOL Tage HARMonic AMPLitude harmonic number MEASure VOL Tage HARMonic PHASe harmonic number Harmonic numbers are related to the programmed frequency of output voltage Queries sent with an argument of 0 return the dc component An argument of 1 indicates the fundamental frequency 2 indicates the second harmonic 3 indicates the third and so on The maximum harmonic component that can be read is limited by the fundamental measurement bandwidth which is 16 kHz An error is generated if a query is sent for a harmonic that has a frequency greater than 16 kHz To return all the harmonic components with a single query use the following commands MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic AMPLitude MEASure ARRay CURRent HARMonic PHASe MEASure ARRay VOL Tage HARMonic AMPLitude MEASure ARRay VOL Tage HARMonic PHASe These queries always return 51 data values from the dc component up to the 50th harmonic Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as the value 0 To return the percentage of total harmonic distortion in the ou
285. uestionable status register STAT QUES is read 6 9 Controlling the Instantaneous Voltage and Current Data Buffers Measurements taken by the Lx Ls Series measurement systems are based on a digital representation of the voltage and current waveforms Both waveforms are digitized with 24 bits of amplitude resolution and down to 10 4 or 31 25 usec of time resolution 96 Ks sec real time sampling rate in single phase three phase mode The available memory depth to hold this information is 4K 4096 samples for each waveform This section covers the SCPI commands that can be used to control the sampling rate and the position of the trigger point in the 4K deep data buffer 6 9 1 Retrieving Measurement Acquistion Data Data can be retrieved by sending the MEAS ARR VOLT or MEAS ARR CURR queries The data returned will be in either binary or ASCII format depending on the state of the MEAS ARR MOD command The sample below assumes the binary data mode is used and only 1K samples are requested from the measurement data buffer Public Sub QueryMeasBuffer ByRef Buffer As Single Dim i j As Integer Dim iBlkSize As Integer Dim iMaxPoints As Integer Dim iPointer As Integer Dim s1 As String Dim gl bAsciiTransfer as boolean Initialize Size gl bAsciiTransfer True iBlkSize 4 iMaxPoints iBlkSize 256 Add block size of iBlkSize and offset of 0 parameters to measurement command cmd FETCH ARR VOLT Cstr iBlkSize
286. urce This uitility uses the network connection to set parameters on the power source so the power source and the PC will have to be connected to the same network through a hub or to each other using a cross over network cable local network 2 Through Front Panel Set the parameters from the front panel CONFIGURATION menu In this case connection to a network is not required to set the LAN parameters This front panel setup mode requires firmware revision 1 33 of higher Check AMETEK Programmable Power web site for firmware downloads To use the CONFIGURATION menu press the MENU and use the up down error keys to display the CONFIGURATION entry Place the pointer on CONFIGURATION and press the ENTER key Then scroll down till you see LANetwork and press ENTER again 29 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II The following fields are available in the LANetwork menu Menu Values LANetwork LAN NE Note If the MAC Address displayed is corrupted or does not match the serial tag there may have been a problem retrieving the LAN port settings This can happen if a static IP was set that conflicts with another device on the network To recover turn on power to the unit while holding down the SET key This will allow the unit to boot without attempting to collect the IP settings You can then set the required IP values See IP Address above Description If the CLAN option is installed pressing Enter while t
287. ure e FETCh e CALibrate Selecting a Phase Two commands determine which output phase or phases receive commands in the three phase mode These are INSTrument COUPle ALL NONE INSTrument NSELect lt n gt The RST setting for INSTrument COUPle is ALL This setting causes programming commands to be sent to all output phases simultaneously To send a programming command to only one of the output phases set INSTrument COUPle to NONE then select the desired output to receive the command with INSTrument NSELect For example when the commands INSTrument COUPle NONE INSTrument NSELect 2 are sent all subsequent voltage commands will go to output phase 2 and all measurement queries will return readings from output phase 2 The INSTrument COUPle command has no effect on queries In the three phase mode queries are always directed to the output selected by INSTrument NSELect Programming the Output Phase You can control the phase of the ac voltage waveform relative to an internal reference with PHASe n which sets the phase in degrees If n is positive the voltage waveform leads the internal reference 129 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il The PHASe command sets the relative phase of each of the outputs The INSTrument COUPle setting is ignored by the PHASe command it always controls the output selected by INSTrument NSELect 6 2 3 Current Limit Note 6 3 All models have a programmable rms curren
288. urement acquisition setup Parameter error Parameter not Incorrect parameter or parameter allowed value Check programming manual for allowable parameters Setting conflict Transient Check other settings E g Redefine programmed with transient mode more than 1 mode As result of TST execution Selftest setting indicates ALC mode is off or conflict waveform not set to Sine Data out of range Parameter data Check programming manual for outside of allowable allowable parameter values range Too much data More data received Check programming manual for than expected number of parameters or data block size 224 Illegal parameter value Parameter value is Check programming manual for not suppored correct parameters Lists not same length One or more All lists must be of same length or transient lists transient cannot be compiled and programmed has executed different length 227 P rogramming Manual Rev S Lx Ls Series II Media full No storage space left Delete other settings or data to make to save settings or room data 255 Directory full Too many waveform Delete one or more waveforms from directory entries waveform memory to make room 256 File name not found Waveform requested Check waveform directory for not in directory waveform names present 257 File name error Incorrect filename Too many or non ASCII characters used in waveform file definition Illegal variabl
289. urrent power etc DFI STATE bool Enable disable DFI output SOURce source Selects an event source QUES OPER ESB RQS OFF PON STATe RST RCLO Set power on state to RST or RCLO PROTection CLEar Reset latched protection DELay lt n gt Delay after programming before protection RI LEVel LOW HIGH MODE mode TTLTrg MODE TRIG FSTR STATE bool SOURce source Sets Remote Inhibit input level mode set remote inhibit input LATC LIVE OFF Sets or disabled Function strobe mode Enable disable trigger out drive Selects a TTLTrg source BOT EOT LIST OUTPut This command enables or disables the AC source output The state of a disabled output is an output voltage amplitude set to O volts with output relays opened When opening the output relay the output is set to O volt first then the output relay is opened A user settable delay may be inserted before the output relay is opened See the PONSetup RELay command for details Your application program should allow for this delay default is 0 1 sec or 100 msec The query form returns the output state Command Syntax Parameters HST Value Examples Query Syntax Returned Parameters Related Commands OUTPut DFI OUTPut STATe lt bool gt 0 OFF 1 ON OFF OUTP 1 OUTP STAT ON OUTPut STATe 0 1 RCL SAV PONS REL This command enables or disables the discrete fault indicator DFI signal to the Lx Ls Series
290. urrent hold value returned with the MEAS CURR AMPL MAX query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent AMPLitude RESet FETCh SCALar CURRent AMPLitude RESet Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR AMPL RES Returned Parameters None Related Commands MEAS CURR AMPL MAX FETC CURR AMPL MAX MEASure CURRent CREStfactor FETCh CURRent CREStfactor Phase Selectable 52 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il These queries return the output current crest factor This is the ratio of peak output current to rms output current Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent CREStfactor FETCh SCALar CURRent CREStfactor Parameters None Examples MEAS CURR CRES FETC CURR CRES Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Related Commands INST NSEL MEASure CURRent HARMonic FETCh CURRent HARMonic Phase Selectable These queries return the rms amplitude of the Nth harmonic of output current The parameter is the desired harmonic number Queries sent with a value of 0 return the dc component A value of 1 returns the fundamental output frequency Harmonic orders can be measured up to the fundamental measurement bandwidth of the measurement system which is 16 kHz Thus the maximum harmonic that can be measured is dependent on the output frequency Any harmonics that represent frequencies greater than 16 kHz are returned as O Query Syntax MEASure SCALar CURRent HARMonic AMPLitude lt NRf gt FETCh SCALar CURRent HARMonic AMPLitude lt NRf gt Parameter
291. using the phase commands is to cause an instantaneous shift in the output waveform phase Subsystem Syntax SOURce PHASe IMMediate lt n gt Sets the output phase MODE mode Sets the phase mode FIX STEP PULS LIST TRIGgered n Sets the triggered phase step or pulse mode only PHASe Phase Selectable This commands sets the phase of the output voltage waveform relative to an internal reference The phase angle is programmed in degrees Positive phase angles are used to program the leading phase and negative phase angles are used to program the lagging phase The PHASe command is not influenced by INSTrument COUPle ALL It applies only to the current output phase selected by INSTrument NSELect Command Syntax SOURce PHASe IMMediate lt NRf gt Parameters 360 through 360 RST Value phase 01 0 phase 02 240 phase 03 120 Examples PHAS 45 PHASE MAX Query Syntax SOURce PHASe Returned Parameters cNR3 Related Commands PHAS MODE PHAS TRIG PHASe MODE Phase Selectable This command determines how the output phase is controlled during a triggered output transient The choices are FIXed The output phase is unaffected by a triggered output transient STEP The output phase is programmed to the value set by PHASe TRIGgered when a triggered transient occurs PULSe The output phase is changed to the value set by PHASe TRIGgered for a duration determined by the pulse commands LIST The wavefo
292. ust be removed to enable the RS232C serial interface Changing this setting requires the top cover to be removed Contact customer service service programmablepower com to obtain authorization to perform this setting change Jumper W2 must be installed for LAN option Removed for RS232C I F Figure 3 4 Position of LAN RS232C selection jumper W2 on 7004 716 2 Range Relay board The RS232C cable required to connect the Lx Ls Source to a PC serial port is a standard 9 pin Male to 9 pin Female straight thorugh serial cable A suitable 6 feet long RS232C cable is supplied with each power soruce CI P N 250709 Replacement cables are available through customer service service programmablepower com 33 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 3 5 Instrument Drivers and Application Software Instrument drivers for National Instruments LabWindows CVI and LabView are generally available for download from the AMETEK Programmable Power web site at www programmablepower com Also available are ready to use interactive graphical user interface GUI programs for download 34 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il 4 SCPI Command Reference 4 1 Introduction This chapter provides a complete listing of all SCPI commands supported by the Lx Ls Series of AC sources Commands are grouped by function according the root level commands Some general command related issues are Phases If acommand can apply to individual phases of an A
293. volatile memory Subsystem Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent Begin current measurement calibration sequence SPHase Query format returns single phase current mea coefficient VOLTage Begin current measurement calibration sequence PASSword Unlock calibration SAVE Save new cal constants in non volatile memory SOURce PHASe Phase offset calibration VOLTage HRANge Query output voltage cal coefficient CALibrate MEASure CURRent Phase Selectable This command can only be used in calibration mode It initiates the calibration of the ac current metering circuits and sets the reference value to calibrate to The query format returns the actual calibration coefficient Use the INST SEL or INST NSEL to select the desired phase Command Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent lt Nrf gt Parameters Reference instrument current reading Query Syntax CALibrate MEASure CURRent Returned Parameters lt NR3 gt Examples CAL MEAS CURR 12 23 Related Commands CAL SAVE CAL MEAS VOLT CALibrate MEASure CURRent SPHase This command can only be used in calibration mode and in query form It applies only to phase 1 Lx or A Ls It returns the single phase mode current measurement calibration coefficient for Lx models and Ls models that have the MODE option Its purpose is to be able to read the calibration status without having to switch the AC source to single phase mode If the Lx or Ls is in single phase mode this command is equivalent to the th
294. voltage of the Lx Ls Series AC source Subsystem Syntax SOURce VOLTage ALC STATe ON OFF REG Sets Auto Level Control to on trip off or regulation SOURce INTernal EXTernal Sets voltage sense source LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude n Sets the ac rms voltage amplitude TRIGgered AMPLitude n Sets the transient voltage amplitude MODE mode Sets the voltage mode FIX STEP PULS LIST PROTection LEVel n Sets the overvoltage protection threshold STATe bool Sets the overvoltage protection state RANGe lt n gt Sets the voltage range REFerance INTernal EXTernal Set the voltage referance to internal or external RPV SENSe SOURce INTernal EXTernal Sets voltage sense source SLEW IMMediate n INFinity Sets the voltage slew rate MODE mode Sets voltage slew mode FIX STEP PULS LIST TRIGgered n INFinity Sets the transient voltage slew rate VOLTage ALC STATe These commands select the various auto level control ALC modes The ALC mode uses the voltage measurement feedback to more precisely regulate the output voltage The following ALC modes can be selected ON 0 OFF 1 REG 2 This enables the ALC trip mode If the programmed voltage cannot be maintained the output is disabled relay opens and a 801 Voltage error is generated This disables the ALC mode This enables the ALC regulation mode The output voltage is regulated based on the readback voltag
295. width or the duty cycle is to be held constant when the pulse period changes The following tables describe how the duty cycle period and width are affected when one two or all three parameters are set in a single program message Command Syntax SOURce PULSe HOLD lt parameter gt Parameters WIDTh DCYCle RST Value WIDTh Examples PULS HOLD DCYC Query Syntax SOURce PULSe HOLD Returned Parameters lt CRD gt Related Commands PULS COUN PULS DCYC PULS PER PULS WIDT 88 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II Parameter Set Sets WIDTh If WIDTh lt PERiod recalculates DCYCle otherwise recalculates the PERiod and DCYCle Sets PERiod If WIDTh lt PERiod recalculates DCYCle otherwise recalculates the PERiod and DCYCle A NI A recalculates DCYCle otherwise recalculates the PERiod and DCYCle Hu Sets DCYCle and recalculates PERiod cs Sets DCYCle and WIDTh and recalculates PERiod Sets DCYCle and PERiod and recalculates WIDTh NI 4 Sets WIDTh If WIDTh PERiod sets the PERiod and recalculates DCYCle otherwise recalculates the PERiod and DCYCle Table 4 1 PULSe HOLD WIDTh parameters 4 Bl Sets WIDTh If WIDTh PERiod sets the PERiod and Parameter Set DCYCle PERiod WIDTh Sets WIDTh and recalculates the PERiod Sets PERiod and recalculates the WIDTh Sets WIDTh If WIDTh PERiod sets the PERiod and recalculates DCYCle otherwise recalculates the PERiod and DCYCle Sets DCYCle a
296. will run the steady state voltage modulation test Command Syntax MS704 NORMalI VOLTage MODulation Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT MOD Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal VOLTage DISTortion TOTal This command will run the steady state voltage distortion test Command Syntax MS704 NORMalI VOLTage DISTortion TOTal Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT DIST TOT Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal VOLTage TRANsient ALL This command will run all the steady state voltage transients tests Command Syntax MS704 NORMalI VOLTage TRANsient ALL Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal VOLTage TRANsient OVER This command will run the steady state over voltage transients test Command Syntax MS704 NORMalI VOLTage TRANsient OVER Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN OVER Query Syntax none 209 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II MS704 NORMal VOLTage TRANsient UNDer This command will run the steady state under voltage transients test Command Syntax MS704 NORMaI VOLTage TRANsient UNDer Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN UND Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal VOLTage TRANsient COMBination This command will run the steady state combination voltage transients test Command Syntax MS704 NORMal VOLTage TRANsient COMBination Parameters none Examples MS704 NORM VOLT TRAN COMB Query Syntax none MS704 NORMal VOLTage TRANsient REPetitve This
297. x Returned Parameters MIL704 FREQuency 60HZ 400HZ VF Requency MIL704 FREQ VFR MIL704 FREQ lt CRD gt 197 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series II 8 6 3 MIL704 Steady State Commands MIL704 SSTate VOLTage This command will set the voltage level for the steady state operation Command Syntax MIL704 SSTate VOLTage LEVel Parameters none Examples MIL704 SST VOLT Query Syntax none MIL704 SSTate MODulation This command will set the voltage modulation level for the steady state operation Command Syntax MIL704 SSTate MODulation Parameters none Examples MIL704 SST MOD Query Syntax none MIL704 SSTate UNBalance This command will set the voltage unbalance for the steady state operation This command is only relavent when in 3 phase mode Command Syntax MIL704 SSTate UNBalance Parameters none Examples MIL704 SST UNB Query Syntax none MIL704 SSTate PHASe UNBalance This command will set the phase angle unbalance for the steady state operation This command is only relavent when in 3 phase mode Command Syntax MIL704 SSTate PHASe UNBalance Parameters none Examples MIL704 SST PHAS Query Syntax none 198 Programming Manual Lx Ls Series Il MIL704 SSTate WAVeform DISTortion This command will set the voltage distortion level for the steady state operation Command Syntax MIL704 SSTate W AVeform DISTortion Parameters none Examples MIL704 SST WAV Query Syntax none MIL704 SST
298. xponent If expo lt gt 0 And expo lt gt amp HFF Then expo expo 127 mant f mant f 1 expo val 2 Abs expo If expo 0 Then mant f If expo 0 Then mant f Else If mant f 0 Then If expo 0 Then mant f mant f EXPO MAX mant f expo val mant f expo val Else mant f mant f EXPO MAX End If End If End If Append number sign and return value If sign Then mant f mant f StringToIEEEFloat mant f Exit Function FloatConvError Conversion errors are truncated to zero StringToIEEEFloat 0 Exit Function End Function MEASure ARRay VOLTage FETCh ARRay VOLTage Phase Selectable These queries return an array containing the instantaneous output voltage in volts The data returned in arbitrary block data format as follows 5 lt block length n gt lt b0 gt lt b1 gt lt b2 gt lt b3 gt lt o0n 3 gt lt bn 2 gt lt bn 1 gt lt bn gt where b0 b1 52 b3 are four hex bytes represent IEEE single precision floating number where bO is the most significant byte and b3 is the least significant byte The number of bytes returned is contained in the data block header which always starts with the pound character followed by a single decimal character indicating the number of digits that make up the block length of the data Thus 516384 indicates that there are 5 digits that follow containing the number of bytes in the data block excluding the header and length information T
299. y a function of the test standard revision Command Syntax Parameters Examples Query Syntax Returned Parameters MS704 SKIP MS704 REVision A B C D E F MS704 REV F MS704 REV lt CRD gt This command skips the currently active test step This command may be used to proceed immediately to the next step in a test sequence Note that if a test steps is normally repeated more than once the SKIP command only skips the repetition that is active For test conditions with more than one repeat to skip to the next test condition will require a SKIP command for each repeat to be issued Alternatively the ABORt command may be used to abort the entire test in progress Command Syntax Parameters Examples Query Syntax MS704 STATus MS704 SKIP none MS704 SKIP none This is a query only command that reports the test progress status of the test step in progress The status returned is either IDLE if no tests are running or the test number test condition and time remaining till completion of the test in minutes and seconds This command query may be used to poll the progress of a test Command Syntax Parameters Examples Query Syntax Returned Parameters Response MS704 STEP MS704 STATus none MS704 STAT MS704 STAT lt CRD gt SAC102 A 03 32 This command sets the execution mode for each test step execution Available settings are SINGLE or CONTINUOUS In single step mode a selected test and test conditi
300. y returns the value of the Questionable Condition register for a specific output of a three phase AC source The particular output phase must first be selected by INST NSEL The Condition register is a read only register which holds the real time unlatched questionable status of the Lx Ls Series Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary CONDition Example STAT QUES INST ISUM COND Returned Parameters NR1 Register value STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary ENABle Phase Selectable This command sets or reads the value of the Questionable Enable register for a specific output of a three phase AC source The particular output phase must first be selected by INST NSEL The Enable register is a mask for enabling specific bits from the Questionable Event register to set the questionable summary QUES bit of the Status Byte register This bit bit 3 is the logical OR of all the Questionable Event register bits that are enabled by the Questionable Status Enable register Command Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary ENABle lt NRf gt Parameters 0 to 32767 Default Value 0 Examples STAT QUES INST ISUM ENAB 18 Query Syntax STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary ENABle Returned Parameters lt 1 gt Register value Related Commands STAT QUES INST ISUM EVEN STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary NTR STATus QUEStionable INSTrument ISUMmary PTR These commands allow the values of the Questionable

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

User manual  UNE SITUATION-PROBLEME EN GEOLOGIE : UN DÉTOUR  S02 Pintura Acrílica Señalización Antideslizante  MC40 Regulatory Guide [Japanese] (P/N 72-166942  SR-2833RGB User Manual - Sunricher Lighting Control  Delta Electronics DVPPS01 User's Manual  Vivanco 33392 flat panel wall mount  Technicolor - Thomson RCR311B User's Manual  VOLTCRAFT® - Conrad Electronic  PDF - LG Pocket Photo  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file